Home
        2014 FIAT 500L Owner`s Manual
         Contents
1.                                  Snow TireS e i pessera rii apera pE yk n 258   Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped E FUEL REQUIREMENTS   1 4L Turbo          272  Tire And Wheel   If Equipped              259 Reformulated Gasoline          o    o  o   273  Compact Spare Tilt  2224440400 riadas 259 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends                273  Tite Spinning easag E a in Gh 260 MMT In Gasoline       o ooooo o ooo ooo    274                            Tread Wear Indicators                    261 Materials Added To Fuel                  274    208 STARTING AND OPERATING HN                                  Fuel System Cautions                00  274 MW RECREATIONAL TOWING  Carbon Monoxide Warnings               275 o a SE on  WM ADDING FUEL    ooo 276 lowing  Hime  Velnicle Behm sneer  Vehicle  MC 279    E TRAILER TOWING                00000  278    A STARTING AND OPERATING 209    STARTING PROCEDURES    Before starting your vehicle  adjust your seat  adjust both  inside and outside mirrors  and fasten your seat belts     WARNING     e Never leave children alone in a vehicle  or with  access to an unlocked vehicle    e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is  dangerous for a number of reasons  A child or  others could be seriously or fatally injured  Chil     dren should be warned not to touch the parking  brake  brake pedal or the shift lever      Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle  or in  a location accessible to children   and do not leave  the ignition
2.         10  loba  i       ED e            I    ELECTRONIC STABILITY    ii  E  p  E  i  i  i  i    du    E  A  O  T  i   amp  i    i    x  s Di    i  i  f  3  i  i  E    A    Dp iw  ES    Ne  O  t    8  2  i  f  i    1910  cS  H  D  ie  lala la im   TI            i  i  E  E  i  i  i  i  i     i  i  i  i    HEATED    i     I    q  EI    Ju  IS    de   19  t  jor  Es   gt     TEM  ique  B  ub    E  i  i  g  i  i  i        3  i   JE    i  3      H      g  i     E   3  3  H       i  i   p ied            O  o   T  ein  E  op     E         i     i      El  3  i  E         8     i  2    eLecraome  CONTROL OFF 010533317    6 INTRODUCTION  WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS    This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against oper   ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily  injury  It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that  could result in damage to your vehicle  If you do not read  this entire Owners Manual  you may miss important  information  Observe all Warnings and Cautions     VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER    The Vehicle Identification Number  VIN  is found on the  left front corner of the instrument panel  visible through  the windshield  This number also appears engraved on  the right front floor pan under the passenger seat  on an  adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the  B Pillar  on the vehicle registration and title           Vehicle Identification Number       INTRODUCTION 7  TE  VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS    WARNING       Any modifications 
3.         llle 237  Trailer TOWING    icem ee nem hee rex 278  Transaxle   AutoSUck se resente ea ba ea 227  Transmission   Automate    us ae a RU wu e CY d 2 214   Fluid   ia duae Beans Sahat  aora dex V Gena 341   Maintenance  iude eX EdTeITR G Bx 341   Manual 22e  hse er a 212    Transmitter  Garage Door Opener  HomeLinkG        1  Transporting Pets    Tread Wear Indicators       o o o ooooooooo oo    261  Trip  Odometer    icon t geret R 164  Trunk Lid  Deck Lid    22 22 27  Trunk Release  Emergency  cacc cesia ranen o    27  Tummsignals  io    cedes aras 157  UCT Connector  viii ms deca iia a 181  Uniform Tire Quality Grades         o o o o o o o    377    Universal Consumer Interface  UCI  Connector         Universal Transmitter           oooooo ooo    129  Unleaded Gasoline        ooooooooooo ooo    272  Untwisting Procedure  Seat Belt                 35  Vehicle Identification Number  VIN                6  Vehicle Loading esdi renier atea e REA 251  Vehicle Modifications  Alterations                 7  Vehicle  Storage   ss cana bae er gae a 355  Vehicle Theft Alarm  Security Alarm               15    A INDEX 395    Wait to Start Light  cres cesas aaea meras 163  Warning Lights  Instrument Cluster Description       155  Warnings and Cations  etosa terde biassa sdiri 6  Warranty Information           ea Diea EE a aa 4  Washer   Adding Fluid   e ao rg papa s n a decas 329  Washers  Windshield              o o ooooooo   112  Washing Vehicle         ooooooococonoooo o   344
4.         o oo ooooo ooo ooooo 27  Rear Window Features          l l eese 147  Reclining Rear Seats       o oooooooooooo ooo    97  Recorder  Event Data              o    ce eee 56  Recreational Towing        oooooooooooooo o    279  Reformulated Gasoline            lisse  273    Refrigerants seite se e da 2a a 4 Rede n 322  Reminder  Seat Belt                           38  Remote Sound System  Radio  Controls           182  Replacement Bulbs           0 0 00 0 00 eee oo  356  Replacement Keys cora ERE E 14  Replacement Parts    sse RR Rega 314  Replacement Tires  ies ei aoia a iaa ia k E 262  Reporting Safety Defects          o o o o o o o o o    375  Restraints  Child  eraman eana aaa A 57  Rotation  Tires  gt   erro crcire cessaria ceria 265  Safety Checks Inside Vehicle           o o o o oo o   77  Safety Checks Outside Vehicle            o o o o o   80  Safety Defects  Reporting        o ooooomoooo o    375  Safety  Exhaust Gas       ooooooooomoooooooo   76  Safety Information  Tir8      ooooooooooooo o    244  Safety PS lid 76  Schedule  Maintenance               0000008 364    Seat Belt Maintenance       392 INDEX In    Seat Belt Reminder             o ooo  eee eee 38  Seat BeltS             ooo ee ooo    77  And Pregnant Women      o oooooooooooooo o 39  Child Restraints seser rarapna 57  Inspection  eie eee de ed 77  Pretensioners           llle 37  Untwisting Procedure         o o o o oooo ooo    35  Seat Belts  Seda          ooooooooocmmmo omo    29  Seats  Fold and 
5.       If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi  1 8 Bar   pressure within 15 minutes       The tire is too badly damaged  Do not attempt to drive  the vehicle further  Call for assistance     NOTE  If the tire becomes over inflated  press the Defla   tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom   mended inflation pressure before continuing     If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at  least 26 psi  1 8 Bar  pressure within 15 minutes     1  Press the Power Button  4  to turn off the TIREFIT kit     2  Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the  Sealant Bottle  1  and place the sticker on the instru   ment panel     a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291    3  Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose  6  from  the valve stem  reinstall the cap on the fitting at the  end of the hose  and place the TIREFIT kit in the  vehicle storage location  Quickly proceed to  D      Drive Vehicle        CAUTION       The metal end fitting from Power Plug  8  may get  hot after use  so it should be handled carefully   e Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end    of the Sealant Hose  6  can result in sealant con   tacting your skin  clothing  and the vehicle s inte   rior  It can also result in sealant contacting internal  TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma   nent damage to the kit      D  Drive Vehicle     Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire   drive the vehicle 5 miles  8 km  or 10 minutes to ensure  distribution 
6.       a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87    Conversation Mirror     If Equipped To gain access to the conversation mirror  pull downward    There is a conversation mirror located at the top of the AR pes    overhead console        Conversation Mirror    Conversation Mirror Location    88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  Power Mirrors    The power mirror controls are located on the driver   s  door trim panel  To adjust a mirror  turn the control knob  toward the left or right mirror positions indicated  Tilt the  control wand in the direction you want the mirror to  move  When you are finished adjusting the mirror  turn  the control to the center position to prevent accidentally  moving a mirror           Power Mirror Controls       UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89  Folding Mirrors    The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to  pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage  The  mirror has three detent positions  full forward  normal  and full rearward     Heated Mirrors     If Equipped    These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice  This  feature can be activated whenever you turn on the  rear window defroster        Sun Visors    Sun Visor  Driver Side Shown     The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the  headliner  near the front windshield  The sun visor can be  rotated downward or up against the door glass  Both sun  visors are equipped with illuminated courtesy mirrors     90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF Y
7.     Towing Condition Wheels OFF AUTOMATIC MANUAL  The Ground TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION  Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Trans in NEUTRAL  Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED  Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED  Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD          Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent  damage to your vehicle  Use only tow bars and other  equipment designed for this purpose  following equip   ment manufacturer s instructions  Use of safety chains is  mandatory  Attach a tow bar or other towing device to  main structural members of the vehicle  not to bumpers  or associated brackets  State and local laws regarding  vehicles under tow must be observed     CAUTION     DO NOT use sling type equipment when towing     When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck  do not  attach to front or rear suspension components  Dam   age to your vehicle may result from improper towing        310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN    Automatic Transmission  e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated     e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck  all wheels off  the ground      CAUTION       DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an  automatic transmission  Damage to the drivetrain  will result       Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re   quirements can cause severe transmission damage   Damage from improper towing is not covered un   der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty     Manual Transmission    e Vehicle can be flat towed  all four wheels on the ground 
8.     e Press the UP Aor DOWN V button briefly   Off   will flash on the display  Press the or UP   or DOWN  button and  On    will appear     e Press the SET ESC button briefly to return to the  submenu screen or hold the button down to return to  the main menu screen without saving     180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    Daytime Running Lamps  DRL    This function may be used to activate   deactivate the  Daytime Running Lamps    Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off     1  Briefly press the MENU button to display the three  sub menus     2  Briefly press the MENU button     On    or    Off    will  flash on the display  according to previous setting      3  Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting     4  Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu  screen  or press and hold the button  approximately  one second  to go back to the main screen without  storing the settings     Hill Start Assist    This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop  on a hill  Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of  brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of  time after the foot has been removed from the brake  pedal     Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off     1  Briefly press the MENU button   On  or  Off  will  flash on the display  according to previous setting      2  Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting     3  Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu  screen  or press and hold the button  app
9.    2 2 3 8 38 8 8 8  8  8 8  8  8  8 D  S  F  S  S  F 8  3 8       ZIRIA  3 6  Additional Maintenance S  Replace engine air filter  X X X X X X X  e  Replace cabin air filter  X X X X X X X E  Replace Brake Fluid every X X X X X X X  B   two years U  Clean and lube sun roof tracks  X X X   X X X X X X X X X X X E  Replace spark plugs     X X X X S  Flush and replace the engine 8  coolant at 10 years or X X  150 000 miles  240 000 km   whichever comes first                                                  368 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN                      i i e e e e e e  Mileage or time passed als s2ilss 2 2 2 S S S S S 3   whichever comes first   S  9 9 19 a a a a S     E T  gt   olos o o e e e e   e 9 8 e io  N e q ive  o  N co o   T       as  Or Years   2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15  Or Kilometers  o o lololo 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2  31813 1313 838 8 8 18 8 S S8 8 8  alolel ol  s N    q o o A ceo   e  e  Gi olor  2 29 t    amp  S  a amp    Inspect and replace PCV valve X   if necessary    Replace the timing belt  X                                                 The spark plug change interval is mileage based only   yearly intervals do not apply     M  A  l  N  T  E  N  A  N  e  E  S  C  H  E  D  U  L  E  S  8       a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 369    WARNING       You can be badly injured working on or around  a motor vehicle  Do only service work for which  you have the knowledge and the right equipment   If you have any doubt about your ability to per     form a service job  ta
10.    ECONOMY MODE    If economy mode is desired  press the A C button to turn  OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor  Then   move the temperature control to the desired temperature     5  Rear Defrost Control    Press and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn  ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside  mirrors  if equipped   An indicator will illuminate when  the rear window defroster is ON  The rear window  defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes     6  Mode Control   Rotate this control to change the system between Modes   Panel  Bi Level  Floor  Mix  Defrost     e Panel     7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instru   ment panel  These outlets can be adjusted to direct  airflow   NOTE  The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed  so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers  for maximum airflow to the rear          Bi Level   e Airis directed through the panel and floor outlets     e Floor   2 Air is directed through the floor outlets with a     small amount flowing through the defrost and  side window demister outlets       Mix  w Air is directed through the floor  defrost  and side  ugh window demister outlets  This setting works best  in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat  to the windshield  This setting is good for maintaining  comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield     e Defrost   Hy Air is directed through the windshield and side  window demister outlets  Use this mode with   ma
11.    portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure  proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst  damage     NOTE  Intentional tampering with emissions control  systems can result in civil penalties being assessed  against you     In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning  engine operation  a scorching odor may suggest severe  and abnormal catalyst overheating  If this occurs  stop  the vehicle  turn off the engine and allow it to cool   Service  including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica   tions  should be obtained immediately     To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage       Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition   when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in  motion       Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the  vehicle       Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires  disconnected or removed  such as when diagnostic  testing  or for prolonged periods during very rough  idle or malfunctioning operating conditions        332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Cooling System    WARNING     e When working near the radiator cooling fan  dis   connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition  switch to the OFF position  The fan is temperature  controlled and can start at any time the ignition  switch is in the ON position       You or others can be badly burned by hot engine  coolant  antifreeze  or steam from your radiator  If  you see or hear steam coming from under the hood   do not o
12.    sr     2500OL     OWNER   S MANUAL    VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA   With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada  the name Chrysler  Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler  Canada Inc  used in substitution therefore     DRIVING AND ALCOHOL   Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents   Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol  evels far below the legal minimum  If you are drinking  don t drive   Ride with a designated non drinking driver  call a cab  a friend  or  use public transportation        WARNING     Driving after drinking can lead to an accident  Your percep     tions are less sharp  your reflexes are slower  and your  judgment is impaired when you have been drinking  Never  drink and then drive           This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features    and equipment that are    either standard or optional on this    vehicle  This manual may also include a description of features    and equipment that are  ordered on this vehicle     no longer available or were not  Please disregard any features and    equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle           Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in  design and specifications  and or make additions to or improve     ments to its products wi       thout imposing any obligation upon    itself to install them on products previously manufactured     FIAT is a registered trad  Corporate Communicati  Chrysle
13.   WARNING     Exhaust gases can injure or kill  They contain carbon  monoxide  CO   which is colorless and odorless   Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even   tually poison you  To avoid breathing  CO   follow  these safety tips       Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in  confined areas any longer than needed to move  your vehicle in or out of the area    e If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate  open  make sure that all windows are closed and  the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high  speed  DO NOT use the recirculation mode         Continued     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77    WARNING   Continued     e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the    engine running  adjust your heating or cooling  controls to force outside air into the vehicle  Set the  blower at high speed        The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into  the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust  system     Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust  system  when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the  vehicle  or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is  damaged  have a competent mechanic inspect the com   plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken   damaged  deteriorated  or mispositioned parts  Open  seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes    to seep into the passenger compartment  In addition   inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised  fo
14.   Water   Driving Through         ooo ococococococooon    230  Wheel and Wheel Trim            o  o  o oooo   345  Wheel and Wheel Trim Care                o   345  Wind Buffeting         llle  26  Windows         lle 24    Power    Windshield Defroster        ooooooooooo oo    78  Windshield Washers          oooooooooomo     112  Windshield Wiper Blades            o o o o o oo    326  Windshield  Wipers        oa eia ae lada 112  Wiper Blade Replacement      o ooooommoooo oo  326       396    INDEX M    INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING  EQUIPMENT   Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicles  electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals   Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be in   stalled properly by trained personnel  The following must be  observed during installation     The positive power connection should be made directly to the  battery and fused as close to the battery as possible  The negative  power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent  to the negative battery connection  This connection should not be  fused        Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or  the rear area of the vehicle  Care should be used in mounting  antennas with magnet bases  Magnets may affect the accuracy or  operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped        The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away  from the vehicle wiring when possible  Use only fully shielded  coaxi
15.   contact  See your child restraint  owner   s manual for more information        Can the head restraints be removed           Yes  all           a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67  Locating The LATCH Anchorages            The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the  rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback  They  are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the  child restraint  You will easily feel them if you run your  finger along gap between the seatback and seat cushion     LATCH Anchorages       LATCH Anchorages    68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    Locating The LATCH Anchorages    47  In addition  there are tether strap anchorages  Hi  behind each rear seating position located on  the back of the seat     LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be  equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side   Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower  anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the  anchorage  Forward facing child restraints and some  rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a  tether strap  The tether strap will have a hook at the end  to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten  the strap after it is attached to the anchorage     To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint    1  If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto   matic Locking Retractor  ALR  seat belt  stow the seat  belt  following the instructi
16.   factured after 1995  These garage door openers can be  identified by the    LEARN    or    TRAIN    button located  where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door  opener  It is NOT the button that is normally used to  open and close the door  The name and color of the  button may vary by manufacturer        0000    Training The Garage Door Opener    1     Door Opener  2     Training Button          N oe    U    UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131      Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in  3 to 8 cm     away from the HomeLink   button you wish to pro   gram while keeping the HomeLink   indicator light in  view       Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink      button you want to program and the hand held trans   mitter button       Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi     cator light  The HomeLink   indicator will flash slowly  and then rapidly after HomeLink   has received the  frequency signal from the hand held transmitter  Re   lease both buttons after the indicator light changes  from slow to rapid        132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM    5     At the garage door opener motor  in the garage    locate the    LEARN    or    TRAINING    button  This can  usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is  attached to the garage door opener device motor   Firmly press and release the    LEARN    or    TRAIN   ING    button  On some garage door openers devices  t
17.   in  certain crash or near crash like situations  such as an air  bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle  data that will  assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per   formed  The EDR is designed to record data related to    vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of  time  typically 30 seconds or less  The EDR in this vehicle  is designed to record such data as     e How various systems in your vehicle were operating       Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts  were buckled   fastened     e How far  if at all  the driver was depressing the  accelerator and or brake pedal  and     e How fast the vehicle was traveling     These data can help provide a better understanding of  the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57    NOTE  EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a  non trivial crash situation occurs  no data are recorded by  the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per   sonal data  e g   name  gender  age  and crash location   are recorded  However  other parties  such as law en   forcement  could combine the EDR data with the type of  personally identifying data routinely acquired during a  crash investigation     To read data recorded by an EDR  special equipment is  required  and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed   In addition to the vehicle manufacturer  other parties   such as law enforcement  that have the special equip   ment  can read the 
18.   maintain the proper level  it should be added to the  coolant bottle  Do not overfill     Points To Remember    NOTE  When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles   kilometers of operation  you may observe vapor coming  from the front of the engine compartment  This is nor   mally a result of moisture from rain  snow  or high  humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor   ized when the thermostat opens  allowing hot engine  coolant  antifreeze  to enter the radiator     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337    If an examination of your engine compartment shows no  evidence of radiator or hose leaks  the vehicle may be  safely driven  The vapor will soon dissipate     e    e    Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle     Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the  coolant expansion bottle  If engine coolant  antifreeze   needs to be added  the contents of the coolant expansion  bottle must also be protected against freezing     If frequent engine coolant  antifreeze  additions are  required  the cooling system should be pressure tested  for leaks     e Maintain engine coolant  antifreeze  concentration    at a minimum of 50  OAT coolant  conforming to  MS 12106  and distilled water for proper corrosion  protection of your engine which contains aluminum  components     Keep the front of the radiator clean  If your vehicle is  equipped with air conditioning  keep the front of the  condenser clean     Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter  op
19.   nails  should not be removed from the tire  TIREFIT can  be used in outside temperatures down to approximately   4  F   20  C      This kit will provide a temporary tire seal  allowing you  to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles  160 km  with a  maximum speed of 55 mph  88 km hr            TIREFIT Storage 1  The TIREFIT kit is located in the rear cargo area on the 2  left side  a  TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation 4  A    s  i  gt  7    M   8       060410595    TIREFIT Components    WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 285      Sealant Bottle     Deflation Button     Pressure Gauge     Power Button     Mode Select Knob     Sealant Hose  Clear      Air Pump Hose  Black     Power Plug       286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  ME  TIREFIT Usage Precautions    o    e     Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle  1  and Sealant  Hose  6  prior to the expiration date  printed on the  bottle label  to assure optimum operation of the sys   tem  Refer to  Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT  section  F    Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement      The Sealant Bottle  1  and Sealant Hose  6  are a one tire  application use  After each use  always replace these  components immediately at an authorized studio     When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form  clean  water  and a damp cloth will remove the material from  the vehicle or tire and wheel components  Once the    sealant dries  it can easily be peeled off and properly  discarded       For optimum performance  make sure the valve stem    on the wheel is fre
20.   signal lever        Tilt Telescoping Control Handle    To unlock the steering column  pull the control handle  down  To tilt the steering column  move the steering  wheel upward or downward as desired  To lengthen or  shorten the steering column  pull the steering wheel  outward or push it inward as desired  To lock the steering  column in position  push the control handle up until fully  engaged     WARNING     Do not adjust the steering column while driving   Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv     ing with the steering column unlocked  could cause  the driver to lose control of the vehicle  Failure to  follow this warning may result in serious injury or  death        a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117  ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL  When engaged  the Electronic Speed Control takes over    accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph   40 km h      The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the  right side of the steering wheel        Electronic Speed Control Buttons       1     RES   2     ON OFF  4     SET   3     CANCEL                   118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II    NOTE  In order to ensure proper operation  the Elec   tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut  down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at  the same time  If this occurs  the Electronic Speed Control  system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic  Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired  vehicle 
21.   use of parts which are not quality equivalent to genuine  parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by  the manufacturer s warranty     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315    STUDIO SERVICE    Your authorized studio has the qualified service person   nel  special tools  and equipment to perform all service  operations in an expert manner  Service Manuals are  available which include detailed service information for  your vehicle  Refer to these Service Manuals before  attempting any procedure yourself     NOTE  Intentional tampering with emissions control  systems may void your warranty and could result in civil  penalties being assessed against you     WARNING     You can be badly injured working on or around a  motor vehicle  Only do service work for which you        Continued     WARNING   Continued     have the knowledge and the proper equipment     If you have any doubt about your ability to perform  a service job  take your vehicle to a competent  mechanic        MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES    The pages that follow contain the required maintenance  services determined by the engineers who designed your  vehicle     Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed    maintenance schedule  there are other components which    may require servicing or replacement in the future     316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    CAUTION     e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per   form repairs and service when necessary could  result in more costly repairs  damage t
22.   vehicle  Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place  provided  Failure to follow these warnings can  result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you   your passengers  and others around you    e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to  come in contact with hair  eyes  or clothing  TIRE   FIT is harmful if inhaled  swallowed  or absorbed  through the skin  It causes skin  eye  and respira   tory irritation  Flush immediately with plenty of  water if there is any contact with eyes or skin   Change clothing as soon as possible  if there is any  contact with clothing         Continued     288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN    WARNING   Continued  kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and    running the air pump  Move the vehicle as necessary    e TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex  In case to place the valve stem in this position before proceed   of an allergic reaction or rash  consult a physician ing     immediately  Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children    If swallowed  rinse mouth immediately with plenty   3  Place the transmission in PARK  auto transmission   of water and drink plenty of water  Do not induce or in Gear  manual transmission  and turn Off the  vomiting  Consult a physician immediately  ignition        4  Set the parking brake    B  Setting Up To Use TIREFIT     1  Turn the Mode Select Knob  5  to the Sealant Mode  position     Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT   A  Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT     1  Pull over to a safe location 
23.   with the transmission in NEUTRAL     e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated        e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck  all wheels off  the ground      CAUTION     Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require     ments can cause severe transmission damage  Dam   age from improper towing is not covered under the  New Vehicle Limited Warranty        CAP LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL    The funnel for the Cap Less Fuel System is located on top  of the spare tire  If your vehicle is out of fuel and an  auxiliary fuel can is needed  insert the funnel into the  filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle     For more information on the Cap Less Fuel System  refer to  Adding Fuel  in  Starting And Operating   in  this manual        MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE    CONTENTS    ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT     1 4L TURBO     313  E ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM     OBD II      314                            Bl REPLACEMENT PARTS ooo       314  WM STUDIO SERVICE         o oocococococooo     315  Bl MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES              315  Engine Oll   cia por ee es 316  Engine Oil Eiltet    cio a ea 319  Engine Air Cleaner Filter                  319   O Maintenance Free Battery                 320  Air Conditioner Maintenance               321                                                                      Body Lubrication        oooooooooooo     325  Wiper Blades 4 4 gaia dale Gs eae ita 326  Adding Washer Fluid                    329  Exhaust System su casgen ered iusan 
24.  AND MOBILE PHONES      184    UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153       INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES       1     Side Vent 7     Fixed Upper Air Vent 13     Climate Controls   2     Radio Controls Behind The Steering Wheel 8     Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag 14     USB Port SD Card AUX Socket   3     Multifunction Lever     Light Control 9     Upper Glove Compartment 15     Uconnect Audio System   4     Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights 10     Storage Compartment 16     Ignition Switch   5     Windshield Wiper  Washer  Trip Computer 11     Lower Glove Compartment 17     Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Horn  6     Central Air Vents 12     Upper Switch Bank 18     Electronic Cruise Control Located    On Steering Wheel       154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  INSTRUMENT CLUSTER          DUO O O YE DU Y  5    A   iv ties ies     24 evo uu             INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS  1  Speedometer    The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per  hour  mph  and or kilometers per hour  km h      2  Cruise On Indicator     If Equipped  This light will turn on when the electronic  speed control is ON  For further information   refer to    Electronic Speed Control    in    Under     standing Your Instrument Panel        3  Cruise SET Indicator     If Equipped    O    This light will turn on when the electronic  speed control is SET  For further information   refer to    Electronic Speed Control    in    Under   standing Your Instrument Panel        UNDERSTANDING Y
25.  CAUTION     plugged in long enough without engine operation   the vehicle   s battery will discharge sufficiently to  degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from    starting  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to    transmission overheating and failure  Allow the en   gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at       FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE least one minute after every five rocking motion    If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud  sand or snow  it can cycles  This will minimize overheating and reduce  often be moved using a rocking motion  Turn the steering   the risk of transmission failure during prolonged  wheel right and left to clear the area around the front efforts to free a stuck vehicle    wheels  Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and       a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307  NOTE  Press the  ESC Off    switch  to place the Electronic  Stability Control  ESC  system in  Partial Off    mode  WARNING    before rocking the vehicle  Refer to    Electronic Brake   Fast spinning tires can be dangerous  Forces gener     Control    in    Starting And Operating    for further infor    ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage   mation  Once the vehicle has been freed  press the  ESC   or even failure  of the axle and tires  A tire could    Off  switch again to restore  ESC On    mode  explode and injure someone  Do not spin your vehi     CAUTION       When  rocking  a stuck vehicle by shifting be   tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE  do n
26.  Clean to clean fabric upholstery and  carpeting     Use MOPAR   Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery     MOPAR   Total Clean is specifically recommended for  leather upholstery     Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular  cleaning with a damp soft cloth  Small particles of dirt  can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery  and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth   Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth  and MOPAR   Total Clean  Care should be taken to avoid  soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid  Please  do not use polishes  oils  cleaning fluids  solvents  deter   gents  or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather  upholstery  Application of a leather conditioner is not  required to maintain the original condition     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347    WARNING     Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes     Many are potentially flammable  and if used in  closed areas they may cause respiratory harm        Cleaning Headlights    Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and  less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights     Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore  different lens cleaning procedures must be followed     To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses  and reducing light output  avoid wiping with a dry cloth   To remove road dirt  wash with a mild soap solution  followed by rinsing     Do not use abrasive cleaning components  solvents  
27.  For  example  a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half  times as well on the government course as a tire graded  100  The relative performance of tires depends upon the  actual conditions of their use  however  and may depart  significantly from the norm due to variations in driving  habits  service practices  and differences in road charac   teristics and climate     IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN    Traction Grades    The Traction grades  from highest to lowest  are AA  A  B   and C  These grades represent the tire   s ability to stop on  wet pavement  as measured under controlled conditions  on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and  concrete  A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor   mance     WARNING     The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on    straight ahead braking traction tests  and does not  include acceleration  cornering  hydroplaning  or  peak traction characteristics        a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 379    WARNING     The temperature grade for this tire is established for  a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded     Temperature Grades    The temperature grades are A  the highest   B  and C   representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat  and its ability to dissipate heat  when tested under  controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  test wheel  Sustained high temperature can cause the  material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life  and  excessive temperature can le
28.  If in doubt about the correct   tightness  have them checked with a torque wrench   by your authorized dealer or at a service station     e To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack   do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle    has been lowered  Failure to follow this warning  may result in personal injury  11  Stow the jack  tools and flat tire     WARNING     A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or  hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve       To avoid possible personal injury  handle the wheel  covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp  edges        9  Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack  handle counterclockwise     hicle  Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in  the places provided  Have the deflated  flat  tire  repaired or replaced immediately        302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN    Spare Tire Stowage  Reverse instructions of the spare removal section     Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut  clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click  is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed     CAUTION     The winch mechanism is designed for use with the    jack wrench extension tool only  Use of air wrench or  power tool may damage the winch        JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE    If your vehicle has a discharged battery  it can be jump   started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in  another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster  pack  Jump starting can 
29.  MOPAR   Antifreeze Coolant  10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT  Organic Additive  Technology  that meets the requirements of Chrysler  Material Standard MS 12106     e Mix a minimum solution of 50  OAT engine coolant  that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material  Standard MS 12106 and distilled water  Use higher  concentrations  not to exceed 7076  if temperatures  below  34   F   37  C  are anticipated     Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion   ized water when mixing the water engine coolant   antifreeze  solution  The use of lower quality water  will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the  engine cooling system     Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main   tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac   cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where  the vehicle is operated     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335    NOTE  Mixing engine coolant  antifreeze  types is not WARNING     recommended and can result in cooling system damage   Drain  flush  and refill as soon as possible to avoid   e The warning words    DO NOT OPEN HOT    on the  damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency  cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution   Never add engine coolant  antifreeze  when the    Cooling System Pressure Ca  Bay P engine is overheated  Do not loosen or remove the    The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine cap to cool an overheated engine  Heat causes pres   coolant  antifreeze  and to e
30.  Paint on scratches as soon as  possible  Your authorized studio has touch up paint to  match the color of your vehicle     Wheel And Wheel Trim Care    e All wheels and wheel trim  especially aluminum and    chrome plated wheels  should be cleaned regularly  with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion       To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust  use    MOPAR   Wheel Cleaner     CAUTION     Do not use scouring pads  steel wool  a bristle brush   or metal polishes  Do not use oven cleaner  These  products may damage the wheel   s protective finish     Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions  or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel   s pro   tective finish  Only MOPAR   Wheel Cleaner or  equivalent is recommended        346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure      If Equipped    Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner     e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting  with a clean  dry towel     e Blot any remaining stain with a clean  damp towel     e     For tough stains  apply MOPAR   Total Clean  or a  mild soap solution to a clean  damp cloth and remove  stain  Use a fresh  damp towel to remove soap residue     e For grease stains  apply MOPAR   Multi Purpose  Cleaner to a clean  damp cloth and remove stain  Use  a fresh  damp towel to remove soap residue       Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of  protectants on Stain Repel products     Interior Care    Use MOPAR   Total
31.  Pivot Pin   3     Wiper Arm   4     Wiper Blade Holder       3  Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade  holder at the end of the wiper arm  and firmly press  the wiper blade until it snaps into place     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329    Adding Washer Fluid    The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the  engine compartment  and the fluid level should be  checked at regular intervals  Fill the reservoir with wind   shield washer solvent  not engine coolant  antifreeze    Refer to    Engine Compartment    in    Maintaining Your  Vehicle    for further information     WARNING     Commercially available windshield washer solvents    are flammable  They could ignite and burn you  Care  must be exercised when filling or working around  the washer solution        Exhaust System    The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into  the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust  system     If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system   or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle   or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged   have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex   haust system and adjacent body areas for broken  dam   aged  deteriorated  or mispositioned parts  Open seams  or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep  into the passenger compartment  In addition  have the  exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised  for lubrication or oil change  Replace as req
32.  RS e 159  Telescoping Steering Column                  116  Temperature Gauge  Engine Coolant             157  Theft Alarm  Security AlarM                    15  Theft System  Security Alarm                   15  Tilt Steering Column     oooooooooooooo ooo    116  Tire and Loading Information Placard            250  TIRE FT oo  utu paritarias ze 284  Tire Markings  i    sse eevee eae 244  cc mms 80   Aging  Life of Tires    soiree RR 261    Air Pressure         llle 254    CAOS aa ara dad ane E eos 264  Changing nara eee dad e Pas ade hae 294  Compact Spare   34 2245 pede eo dee s 259  General Information         o           254  High Speed    casse ia is 257  Inflation Pressures          o    ooo      255  Jacking    45 mime G8 ba il eed dae D E 294  Life of Tires  4 cid ened Kohat ead hee ees s 261  Load    Capacity  poso tae oe ee 250  Pressure Monitor System  TPMS               266  Pressure Warning Light                     162  Quality Grading           ostendens riisi 377  Radial 2 urba EE ahh hace aus ae aa 257  Replacement          llle 262  ROtatOri   ud edpuk exces Ru x ta oS 265  DOIG  suce qpestonda ouod d acida 244  So NP RP 245  Snow Tires se vu hd Sam pg aos 258       394 INDEX IN    SPINNING DEC 260   Tread Wear Indicators          o    ooo      261  Tire Safety Information       ooooooooooooo oo  244  LO WINE i  ai aida La 278   Disabled Vehicle                          309   Recreational          llle 279  Tractor E OP Ek a da e Se s 229  Traction Control 
33.  Starting and Operating   for further information     ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER   EVIC     The Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC  fea   tures a driver interactive display that is located in the  instrument cluster     The EVIC consists of the following    e System Status   e Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays     Personal Settings  Customer Programmable Features     Outside Temperature Display    e Trip Computer Functions    a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167    EVIC Screen   The EVIC will display the following    e Time     Date or trip distance display in miles or kilometers    Outside temperature    e Gear Indicator    e     Odometer  display of distance travelled in miles   kilometers     e Car status indication  e g  doors open  possible ice on  road  etc      EVIC Control Buttons    The EVIC control buttons are located on the instrument  panel below the radio     Press the MENU button briefly to access the menu  and or go to next screen or to confirm the required menu  option  Press and hold the MENU button  approximately  one second  to return to the main screen     Press the UP AA button to scroll upward through the  displayed menu and the related options or to increase the  displayed value     Press the DOWN V button to scroll downward through  the displayed menu and the related options or to de   crease the value displayed     NOTE  UP A and DOWN Y buttons activate different  functions according to the following situations     
34.  Tire Identification Number  TIN     The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire   however  the date code may only be on one side  Tires  with white sidewalls will have the full TIN  including the  date code  located on the white sidewall side of the tire     Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall  tires as mounted on the vehicle  If the TIN is not found on  the outboard side  then you will find it on the inboard  side of the tire     248 STARTING AND OPERATING HN       EXAMPLE   DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301          DOT   Department of Transportation        This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S  Department of Transportation tire  safety standards and is approved for highway use       MA   Code representing the tire manufacturing location  two digits        L9   Code representing the tire size  two digits   ABCD   Code used by the tire manufacturer  one to four digits        03   Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured  two digits       03 means the 3rd week       01   Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured  two digits       01 means the year 2001        Prior to July 2000  tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the  year in which the tire was manufactured  Example  031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991             a STARTING AND OPERATING 249  Tire Terminology And Definitions       Term Definition    B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the str
35.  YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE    9  Front Defrost Control    Press and release the Front Defrost Control button to  change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode  The  indicator illuminates when this feature is ON  Perform   ing this function will cause the ATC to switch into  manual mode  The blower speed may increase when  Defrost mode is selected  If the front defrost mode is  turned OFF  the climate system will return to the previ   ous setting     10  Passenger Temperature Control    Provides the passenger with independent temperature  control  Rotate adjustment knob to set desired temperature     NOTE  Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control  knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync     11  SYNC Button    Press the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON OFF   The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is  enabled  Sync is used to synchronize the passenger  temperature setting with the driver temperature setting   Changing the passenger temperature setting while in  Sync will automatically exit this feature     12  AUTO Button    Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by  adjusting airflow distribution and amount  Performing  this function will cause the ATC to switch between  manual mode and automatic modes     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193    Description    The automatic dual zone climate control system regulates  the air temperatures in the passenger compartment in  two zones  driver side and passenger side     Th
36.  YOUR VEHICLE 85    MIRRORS  Inside Day Night Mirror    A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle  It is  a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind   shield  The mirror installs on the windshield button with  a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for  mounting  The mirror head can be adjusted up  down   left  and right for various drivers  The mirror should be  adjusted to center on the view through the rear window     Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced  by moving the small control under the mirror to the night  position  toward the rear of the vehicle   The mirror  should be adjusted while the small control under the  mirror is set in the day position  toward the windshield      A    Adjusting Rearview Mirror    86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  Automatic Dimming Mirror     If Equipped    This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare  from vehicles behind you  You can turn the feature on or  off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror  A light  to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when  the dimming feature is activated  The sensor to the right  of the button does not illuminate     NOTE  This feature is disabled when the vehicle is  moving in reverse        Automatic Dimming Mirror    CAUTION     To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning  never    spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror   Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the  mirror clean  
37.  YOUR VEHICLE In    3  With the screwdriver remove the tab of yellow color  4  Introduce the screwdriver into the seat B in order to   A  trigger the release tab of the trunk  follow the direction  arrow to open        a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29    OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS    Some of the most important safety features in your  vehicle are the restraint systems       Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating posi   tions    Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger  e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag    e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains  SABIC   for the driver and passengers seated next to a window    e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags  SAB     e     Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants    Front seat belts incorporate dual pretensioners that  may enhance occupant protection by managing occu   pant energy during an impact event    e All seat belt systems  except the driver s  include  Automatic Locking Retractors  ALRs   which lock the  seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt  all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the  desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large  item in a seat     if equipped    Please pay close attention to the information in this  section  It tells you how to use your restraint system  properly  to keep you and your passengers as safe as  possible     If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized  seat belts  the seat belts or the Low
38.  aaa 12  Key  Sentry  Immobilizer                    0  13    Lane Change and Turn SignalS                 157  Lane Change Assist  pe soe ere d doe are 108  Latches  va  rada 80  Lead Eres Gasol  cil ais ce Ria sea 272  Leaks  Elis spore   die RES Ad EE X pred 80  MAA dia alae dra BE deus 261  Liftgate  Sedan    24 55 sicario debt 27  Light Bulbs  csc sse t ae 80  Lights   iiu eee Re xam ed 80  Aithag si sae eae edad oho neni E ead 47  Anti EocK x3 eae eho re ae ed 165  Brake Assist Warning                 205  240  Brake Warning iore sas aiot huda Ae aai 156  Bulb Replacement       ooooooooommoooo oo  357  Center Mounted Stop      oooooooomoooo oo  358  Engine Temperature Warning                 158  ExteriOE uec nos a OR SUR UR RO a A RC 80  High Beam Indicator eses si e senasa ieden 159  Low Fuel orres dep pae e dep UR uE pia 157    A INDEX 389    Malfunction Indicator  Check Engine            161  Oil Pressure sos pex drea xot set dps 160  Park 42244 Pee oa dE art ape ep rd dd 108  Passes Ro rod ts pakausi o seie docs 108  Seat Belt Reminder sses i rossis Gothen 159  Security Alarm  Theft Alarm                  15  elu CC        Sa dee Gy 357  Service Engine Soon  Malfunction Indicator       161  Tire Pressure Monitoring  TPMS               162  Traction Control        o ooooooooooo oo o    240  Turi Signal o need eee rr bode Read np 80  Wait to Start    cece eee eee ro 163  Warning  Instrument Cluster Description         155  Loading Vehicle  TAGS  onc tee hye teas Geet
39.  accelerated     e Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful in  snow or icy conditions  To select second or third gear  after the vehicle is brought to a stop  tap the shift lever  rearward     once or twice        228 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    e    e     The transmission will automatically upshift when nec   essary to prevent engine over speed     The system will ignore shift commands that would  cause engine lugging or overspeed  An audible beep  will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested     Avoid using speed control when AutoStick   is engaged  because the transmission will not shift automatically     Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when  AutoStick   is engaged     If the system detects powertrain overheating  the  transmission will revert to a automatic shift mode and  remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off     e If the system detects a problem  it will disable    AutoStick   mode and the transmission will return to  automatic mode until the problem is corrected       To disengage AutoStick   mode  return the shift lever    to the DRIVE position  You can shift in or out of the  AutoStick   position at any time without taking your  foot off the accelerator pedal     WARNING     Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a    slippery surface  The drive wheels could lose their  grip and the vehicle could skid  causing a collision or  personal injury        A STARTING AND OPERATING 229    DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES  Acc
40.  and then briefly press  the MENU button     4  When accessing the    Distance    submenu  briefly press  the MENU button  Either    mi    or    km    will appear on  the display  according to the previous setting      5  Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting     6  Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub   menu     7  When accessing the    Fuel Economy    submenu  briefly  press the MENU button  Either    mpg        km l     or     1 100km    will appear on the display  according to  the previous setting      If the distance unit set is    mi     the fuel economy unit will  be displayed in    mpg           178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    If the distance unit setis    km     the fuel economy unit will  be displayed in either km 1 or 1 100km     1  Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting     2  Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub   menu     3  When accessing the    Temperature    submenu  briefly  press the MENU button  Either      F    or      C    will appear  on the display  according to the previous setting      4  Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting     5  Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub   menu     When you have made the required settings  briefly press  the MENU button to go back to the sub menu screen  or  press and hold the MENU button  approximately one  second  to go back to the main screen without storing the  settings     Language  Selecting The Language     The messages can be displayed i
41.  are certified to new Federal regulations for Advanced  Air Bags        40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to allow the  air bags to have different inflation levels based on several  factors  including the severity and type of collision     This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front  passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the  inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags based  upon seat position     This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front  passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether  the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened  The  seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation level of  the Advanced Front Air Bags     This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag  Inflatable Curtains  SABIC  to protect the driver  front   and rear passengers sitting next to a window  The SABIC  are located above the side windows  The trim covering  the SABIC is labeled AIRBAG     This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted  Side Air Bags  SAB   The SAB are marked with an air bag  label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats        Advanced Driver Air Bag       THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41  Air Bag System Components    Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag   system components      Occupant Restraint Controller  ORC  a   e Air Bag Warning Light   e Steering Wheel and Column    Instrument Panel   e Supplem
42.  as garage  door openers  motorized gates  lighting or home security  systems  The HomeLink   unit operates off your vehicles  battery     The HomeLink   buttons that are located in the sunvisor  designate the three different HomeLink   channels  The  HomeLink   indicator is located above the center button        HomeLink   Buttons Sunvisor  NOTE  HomeLink   is disabled when the Vehicle Secu   rity Alarm is active     130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM    Before You Begin Programming HomeLink      Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage  before you begin programming     For more efficient programming and accurate transmis   sion of the radio frequency signal itis recommended that  a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of  the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink    system     Erase all channels before you begin programming  To  erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN  position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink    buttons  I and III  for up 20 seconds or until the red  indicator flashes     NOTE     e Erasing all channels should only be performed when  programming HomeLink   for the first time  Do not  erase channels when programming additional buttons     e If you have any problems  or require assistance  please  call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or  on the Internet at  www HomeLink com for information or assistance     Programming A Rolling Code    For programming garage door openers that were manu 
43.  audible signals are emitted  the audio system is not If this condition occurs for the external sensors  the signal  muted  is turned off after 3 seconds  stopping warnings during  The audible signal is turned off immediately if the maneuvers parade o wale    distance increases  The tone cycle remains constant if   the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant        Failure Indications    A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system  is indicated  during REVERSE gear engagement  by the    instrument panel warning icon   A equipped   Refer to    Instrument Cluster De   scriptions    in    Understanding Your Instrument    Panel    for further information     The warning icon is illuminated and a message  is displayed on the multifunction display  if    The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the  ignition is in the ON RUN position  Failures are indi   cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON     Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor  is in failure condition  the instrument cluster display  shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavail   able  without reference to the sensor in failure condition   If even a single sensor fails  the entire system must be  disabled  The system is turned off automatically     UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123  Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System    Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water  car wash  soap and a soft cloth  Do not use rough or hard c
44.  con   stantly updated  The message            will appear on the  display if the car is parked with the engine running     Average Speed    This value shows the vehicle s average speed as a func   tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset     Travel Time    This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset     Personal Settings  Customer Programmable  Features     Dimmer    The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable  of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust   ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly     NOTE  The brightness of the instrument panel may  change while travelling following an event that causes  switching from    day    to    night    conditions  or vice  versa  in the passenger compartment  e g  in a tunnel  on  avenues in shadows  under bridges  etc       To adjust the brightness  proceed as follows   1  Press the UP   or DOWN V button to set the  required brightness level     2  Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu  screen or press and hold the MENU  approximately  one second  to go back to the main screen without  storing settings        174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    Speed Beep  Speed Limit     With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit   mph or km h   when this limit is exceeded the driver is  immediately alerted     To set the speed limit  proceed as follows     1  Briefly press the MENU button  The display will show  the message  Speed Beep      2  Press
45.  conditions  if the following  conditions are verified     e outside temperature low     engine coolant temperature low       engine on     e fan speed set to Ist speed       Temperature Control knob turned completely clock   wise to red section     The heater is switched off when at least one of the  conditions above is no longer verified     NOTE  The power of the electric heater is modulated  according to the battery voltage     System Maintenance    In winter  the climate control system must be turned on at  least once a month for about 10 minutes     Have the system inspected at a Fiat Studio before the  summer     NOTE  The system uses R134a coolant which does not  pollute the environment in the event of accidental leak   age  Under no circumstances use R12 fluid which is  incompatible with the components of the system     19 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System   If Equipped     Controls       Automatic Temperature Controls  ATC     1  Driver Temperature Control    Provides the driver with independent temperature con   trol  Rotate adjustment knob to set desired temperature     NOTE  In Sync mode  this button will also automatically  adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same  time     2  Recirculation Control    Press and release to change the current setting  The  indicator illuminates when ON     NOTE     When in Defrost mode  the Recirculation button will  flash if pressed  This indicates that you can not pr
46.  door or window  Your vehicle  has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains   SABIC  or Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags   SAB   and when deployment occurs  the SABIC and  SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space  between you and the door     5  If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be    modified to accommodate a disabled person  contact  the Customer Center  Phone numbers are provided in   If You Need Consumer Assistance        WARNING     e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more  severe injuries in a collision  The air bags work    with your seat belt to restrain you properly  In  some collisions  the air bags won t deploy at all   Always wear your seat belts even though you have  air bags      Continued        a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31    WARNING   Continued       Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument  panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment  could cause serious injury  including death  Air  Bags need room to inflate  Sit back  comfortably  extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or  instrument panel    Side air bags also need room to inflate  Do not lean  against the door or window  Sit upright in the  center of the seat    In a collision  you and your passengers can suffer  much greater injuries if you are not properly buck   led up  You can strike the interior of your vehicle or  other passengers  or you can be thrown out of the  vehicle  Always be sure you and others in your 
47.  drive your vehicle unless  the hood is fully closed  with both latches engaged     WARNING     Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your  vehicle  If the hood is not fully latched  it could open  when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision   Failure to follow this warning could result in serious  injury or death        106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ma  LIGHTS  Multifunction Lever    The multifunction lever  located on the left side of the  steering wheel  controls the operation of the headlights   headlight beam selection  passing light and turn signals     NOTE  The external lights can only be turned on with  the ignition in the ON RUN position        Multifunction Lever    aaa UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107  Headlights    Z       Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up   ward to the first detent for headlight operation        Headlight Operation    NOTE  When the headlights are turned on  the Daytime  Running Lights will be deactivated     Daytime Running Lights     If Equipped    To activate the Daytime Running Lights  DRL   rotate the  end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol     NOTE  The low beams and side tail lights will not be on  with DRL     The DRL function can be turned on or off using the  display menus  Refer to  Electronic Vehicle Information  Center  EVIC   in  Understanding Your Instrument  Panel  for further information     High Beams     D  With the low beams activated  pull the multifunc   t
48.  edge     3  Do not apply paper or tape to the disc  avoid scratch   ing the disc     4  Do not use solvents such as benzene  thinner  cleaners   or anti static sprays     5  Store the disc in its case after playing   6  Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight     7  Do not store the disc where temperatures may become  too high        184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    NOTE  If you experience difficulty in playing a particular  disc  it may be damaged  i e   scratched  reflective coating  removed  a hair  moisture or dew on the disc  oversized   or have protection encoding  Try a known good disc  before considering disc player service     RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES    Under certain conditions  the mobile phone being on in  your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from  your radio  This condition may be lessened or eliminated  by relocating the mobile phone antenna  This condition is  not harmful to the radio  If your radio performance does  not satisfactorily    clear    by the repositioning of the  antenna  it is recommended that the radio volume be  turned down or off during mobile phone operation     CLIMATE CONTROLS  Manual Climate Control System    Controls       Manual Temperature Control  MTC     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185    The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary  dials  an inner push knob and two push buttons     1  Temperature Control    Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air  insid
49.  equipment or from your authorized studio     The message    plug in engine heater    will be displayed in  the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is  below 5   F   15  C  at the time the engine is shut off as a  reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold  start     NOTE  Use of the recommended SAE 5W 40 Synthetic oil  and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is  important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfac   tory starting in cold conditions     Extended Park Starting    NOTE  Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle  has not been started or driven for at least 35 days     1  Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery  to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle     2  Turn the ignition switch to the START position and  release it when the engine starts     3  If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds  turn the  ignition switch to the STOP  OFF LOCK  position   wait 10 seconds to allow the starter to cool  then repeat  the Extended Park Starting procedure     A STARTING AND OPERATING 211    If Engine Fails To Start CAUTION   Continued   WARNING    To prevent damage to the starter  do not continu     Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the  throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start    the vehicle  This could result in a flash fire causing   After Starting    serious personal injury  The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will  decrease as the engine warms u
50.  even if TCS and ESC are in  the Partial Off mode  Refer to    Electronic Stability Con   trol  ESC     in this section for further information        238 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    Hill Start Assist  HSA     The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when  starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill  HSA will maintain  the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short  period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake  pedal  If the driver does not apply the throttle during this  short period of time  the system will release brake  pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill  The  system will release brake pressure in proportion to the  amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in  the intended direction of travel     HSA Activation Criteria    The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to  activate     e Vehicle must be stopped     e Vehicle must be on a 5  grade or greater hill     e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction  i e    vehicle in NEUTRAL  manual transmission   vehicle  facing uphill is in forward gear  vehicle backing uphill  is in REVERSE gear      WARNING     There may be situations on minor hills  i e   less than  8    with a loaded vehicle  or while pulling a trailer     when the system will not activate and slight rolling  may occur  This could cause a collision with another  vehicle or object  Always remember the driver is  responsible for braking the vehicle        Disabling Enabling HSA    If 
51.  for correct SAE grade    Engine Oil Filter   14L Turbo Engine   We recommend you use MOPAR   Engine Oil Filter    Spark Plugs   1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPARO Spark Plugs  Gap 0 026in   65 mm    Fuel Selection   1 4L Turbo Engine 87 Octane Acceptable     91 Octane Recommended                         a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361    Chassis       Component    Fluid  Lubricant  or Genuine Part       Manual Transmission     If Equipped    We recommend you use MOPAR   C635 DDCT MTX Transmission  Fluid       Automatic Transmission     If Equipped    We recommend you use MOPAR   C635 DDCT MTX Transmission  Fluid       Brake Master Cylinder       We recommend you use MOPAR   DOT 4  If DOT 4 brake fluid is not  available  then DOT 3 is acceptable                 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES    CONTENTS    B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE               364 Maintenance Chart                                     M  A  l  N  T  E  N  A  N   e  E  S   e  H  E  D  U  L  E  S  8       M  A  l  N  T  E  N  A  N  ie  E  S  C  H  E  D  U  L  E  S  8       364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES INN    MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE    Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change  indicator system  The oil change indicator system will  remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for  scheduled maintenance     Based on engine operation conditions  the oil change  indicator message will illuminate  This means that ser   vice is required for your vehicle  Operating conditions  such as frequent short trips 
52.  gine coolant  antifreeze  or any    globally compat   ible    coolant  antifreeze   If a non OAT engine        Continued     coolant  antifreeze  is introduced into the cooling  system in an emergency  it should be flushed with  OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT  engine coolant  antifreeze  as soon as possible      Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine  coolant  antifreeze  products  Do not use additional    rust inhibitors or antirust products  as they may not  be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and  may plug the radiator    e This vehicle has not been designed for use with  propylene glycol based engine coolant  antifreeze    Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant  anti   freeze  is not recommended        334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Adding Coolant    Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine  coolant  OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106  that allows  extended maintenance intervals  This engine coolant   antifreeze  can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles   240 000 km  before replacement  To prevent reducing this  extended maintenance period  it is important that you use  the same engine coolant  OAT coolant conforming to  MS 12106  throughout the life of your vehicle     Please review these recommendations for using Organic  Additive Technology  OAT  engine coolant  antifreeze   that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan   dard MS 12106  When adding engine coolant  antifreeze      e We recommend using
53.  has  diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could  recur     If the transmission cannot be reset  authorized studio  service is required     A STARTING AND OPERATING 227    AUTOSTICK       IF EQUIPPED    AutoStick   is a driver interactive transmission feature  providing manual shift control  giving you more control  of the vehicle  AutoStick   allows you to maximize en   gine braking  eliminate undesirable upshifts and down   shifts  and improve overall vehicle performance  This  system can also provide you with more control during  passing  city driving  cold slippery conditions  mountain  driving  and many other situations     Operation    When the shift lever is in the AutoStick   position  beside  the Drive position   it can be moved forward and rear   ward  This allows the driver to manually select the  transmission gear being used  Moving the shift lever  forward     triggers a downshift  and rearward     an  upshift  The current gear will be displayed in the instru   ment cluster     NOTE  In AutoStick   mode  the transmission will only  shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever  rearward     or forward      except as described below     e The transmission will automatically downshift as the  vehicle slows  to prevent engine lugging  and will  display the current gear     e The transmission will automatically downshift to first  gear when coming to a stop  After a stop  the driver  should manually upshift     the transmission as the  vehicle is
54.  have an Auto Down feature  Press down  Remove the obstacle and use the window    the window switch for approximately one second  re  switch again to close the window     lease  and the window will go down automatically  To   Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger  cancel the Auto Down movement  operate the switch in the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto     either the up or down direction and release the switch  closure  If this happens  pull the switch lightly to the  first detent and hold to close the window manually     26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II    WARNING  Wind Buffeting    Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of  pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the  ears  Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the  windows down  or the sunroof  if equipped  in certain  open or partially open positions  This is a normal occur   rence and can be minimized  If the buffeting occurs with  Should the Auto Up feature stop working  the window the sunroof open  adjust the sunroof opening to minimize  probably needs to be reset  To reset Auto Up  the buffeting or open any window     There is no anti pinch protection when the window    is almost closed  Be sure to clear all objects from the  window before closing        Resetting The Auto Up Feature    1  Pull the window switch up to close the window  completely and continue to hold the switch up for an  additional two seconds after the window is closed     2  
55.  high alcohol content or  abrasive cleaners  If soap is used  wipe clean with a  clean damp rag     2  Dry with a soft cloth     Seat Belt Maintenance    Do not bleach  dye or clean the belts with chemical  solvents or abrasive cleaners  This will weaken the fabric   Sun damage can also weaken the fabric     If the belts need cleaning  use a mild soap solution or  lukewarm water  Do not remove the belts from the car to  wash them  Dry with a soft cloth     Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the  buckles do not work properly     MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349    FUSES The ID number of the electrical component correspond   ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover        Underhood Fuses                            The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of Cavi Maxi   s gs    avity Mini Fuse Description  the engine compartment  next to the battery  To access the Fuse  fuses  press the release tabs and remove the cover  F01 60 Amp Body Controller  Blue  F02 60 Amp Body Controller  Blue Rear Distribution  Unit  F03 20 Amp Ignition Switch  Yellow  F04 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake  Orange Pump  F05 70 Amp Electric Power  Tan Steering                      Front Distribution Unit    350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN                            Cavity nn Mini Fuse Description Cavity in Mini Fuse Description  F06 30 Amp Radiator Fan   F15 15 Amp   Transmission  Green Low Speed Blue  F07 50 Amp Radiator Fan   F16 7 5 Amp   Transmission  Red High Spee
56.  in the ACC or ON RUN position  A child  could operate power windows  other controls  or  move the vehicle        Manual Transmission     If Equipped    Apply the parking brake  place the shift lever in NEU   TRAL  and press the clutch pedal before starting the  vehicle  This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock   ing ignition system  It will not start unless the clutch  pedal is pressed to the floor     Automatic Transmission     If Equipped    The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL  position before you can start the engine  Apply the brakes  before shifting to any driving gear     NOTE  You must press the brake pedal before shifting  out of PARK     Normal Starting  NOTE  Normal starting of either a cold or a warm  engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the  accelerator pedal        210 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    Turn the ignition switch to the AVV  START  position and  release it when the engine starts  If the engine fails to start  within 10 seconds  turn the ignition switch to the STOP   OFF LOCK  position  wait 10 to 15 seconds  then repeat  the    Normal Starting    procedure     Cold Weather Operation    To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low  temperatures  this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking  when the ambient temperature is less than  22   F   30   C   and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an  engine block heater has not been used  An externally   powered electric engine block heater is available as  optional
57.  laws contributes to a good break in   Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri   mental and should be avoided     The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a  high quality energy conserving type lubricant  Oil changes  should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions    under which vehicle operations will occur  For the recom   mended viscosity and quality grades  refer to    Mainte   nance Procedures    in    Maintaining Your Vehicle        CAUTION     Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil  in the engine or damage may result        NOTE  A new engine may consume some oil during its  first few thousand miles  kilometers  of operation  This  should be considered a normal part of the break in and  not interpreted as an indication of difficulty     76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    SAFETY TIPS    Transporting Passengers    NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO    AREA     WARNING       Do not leave children or animals inside parked  vehicles in hot weather  Interior heat build up may  cause serious injury or death    e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area   inside or outside of a vehicle  In a collision  people    riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously  injured or killed     Do not allow people to ride in any area of your  vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts     Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and  using a seat belt properly        Exhaust Gas  
58.  may cause deterioration of the wiper blades  Always use  washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt  from a dry windshield or rear window     Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from  the windshield or rear window  Make sure that they are  not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid  damaging the blade  Keep the blade rubber out of contact  with petroleum products such as engine oil  gasoline  etc     NOTE  Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending  on geographical area and frequency of use  Poor perfor   mance of blades may be present with chattering  marks   water lines or wet spots  If any of these conditions are  present  clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary     A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327  Front Wiper Blade Removal Installation      1  Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper  blade off of the windshield     2  Press the release button on the arm of the wiper blade   3  Push the wiper blade up the and remove it  i    1     Wiper Blade  2     Release Button 7    3     Wiper Arm       4  Install the wiper blade and firmly press the wiper  blade until it snaps into place     328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation    1  Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper  blade off of the liftgate glass     2  Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it  forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper  blade holder        Se    Was    1     Wiper Blade   2     Blade
59.  mm   75 mph  120 km h         e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire   sidewall damage is not repairable  and       258 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and  additional information     Damaged Run Flat tires  or Run Flat tires that have  experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme   diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and  service description  Load Index and Speed Code      All Season Tires     If Equipped    All Season tires provide traction for all seasons  spring   summer  fall and winter   Traction levels may vary be   tween different all season tires  All season tires can be  identified by the M S  M amp S  M S or MS designation on  the tire sidewall  Use all season tires only in sets of four   failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and  handling of your vehicle     Summer Or Three Season Tires     If Equipped    Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi   tions  and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice   Summer tires will not contain the all season designation  or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall  Use  summer tires only in sets of four  failure to do so may  adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle     Snow Tires    Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires  during the winter  Snow tires can be identified by a  mountain  snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall     If you need snow tires  select tires equ
60.  mounted for a long period  it is possible to filter  out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in  sensor field of view  The filtering operation must be  performed only by an authorized studio         Continued     126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM    PARKVIEW   REAR BACK UP CAMERA      IF EQUIPPED    Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView   Rear  Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen  image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever  the shift lever is put into REVERSE  The image will be  displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau   tion note to    check entire surroundings    across the top of  the screen  After five seconds this note will disappear   The ParkView   camera is located on the rear of the  vehicle above the rear License plate     When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE  the rear  view image shall not be displayed for more than 5 sec   onds and the navigation or audio screen appears again     When displayed  static grid lines will illustrate the width  of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will  help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle  The  following table shows the approximate distances for each  zone                    Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle  Red 0   1 ft  0   30 cm    Yellow 1 ft   3 ft  30 cm   1 m    Green 3 ft or greater  1 m or greater           a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127    WARNING  CAUTION     Drivers must be careful whe
61.  not damage  the transmission     e Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch    odor similar to a manual transmission  An active  warning message will display in the Instrument Clus   ter if cool down actions are needed     When stopped on an incline  always hold the vehicle  in place using the brakes  On steep inclines  Hill Start  Assist  HSA  will temporarily hold the car in position  when the brake pedal is released  If the accelerator  pedal is not applied after a short time  the car will roll  back  Either reapply the brake  to hold the vehicle  or  press the accelerator to climb the hill     Before and after the engine is started  you may hear a  hydraulic pump for a short period of time  This noise  is normal and will not damage the transmission  When  frequent transmission shifting occurs  such as when       222 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions  Instrument Cluster Messages  in hilly terrain  or traveling into strong head winds   use the AutoStick   shift control  refer to    AutoStick       in this section for further information  to select a lower  gear  Under these conditions  using a lower gear will  improve performance and extend transmission life by MESSAGE DESCRIPTION    reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup  During GEAR NOT In Autos  ck   mode the    extremely cold temperatures  the tranen sion will not AVAILABLE gear selected by the driver  operate if the oil temperature is  22  F   30  C  or be
62.  of special dyes for diagnosing fluid  leaks  Avoid using transmission sealers as they may  adversely affect seals     CAUTION     Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission    as the chemicals can damage your transmission com   ponents  Such damage is not covered by the New  Vehicle Limited Warranty     Fluid Level Check    The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not  require adjustment under normal operating conditions   Routine fluid level checks are not required  therefore  the transmission has no dipstick  Your authorized studio  can check your transmission fluid level using special  service tools  If you notice fluid leakage or transmission  malfunction  visit your authorized studio immediately to  have the transmission fluid level checked  Operating the  vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe  transmission damage     CAUTION     e If a transmission fluid leak occurs  visit your au   thorized studio immediately  Severe transmission  damage may occur  Your authorized studio has the  proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately        a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343    Fluid And Filter Changes    Refer to the  Maintenance Schedule    for the proper  maintenance intervals  In addition  change the fluid and  filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason     Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion  Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion    Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo   graphic locations and us
63.  on a  jack         Continued     298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN    CAUTION     Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on    WARNING   Continued       Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a  jack      Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack   If you need to get under a raised vehicle  take it to  a service center where it can be raised on a lift      Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for  lifting this vehicle during a tire change     e If working on or near a roadway  be extremely  careful of motor traffic        Jack Warning Label       locations other than those indicated in the Jacking  Instructions for this vehicle        1  Remove the spare tire  jack  and wheel bolt wrench     2  If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center  cap covers the wheel bolts  use the wheel bolt wrench  to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the  vehicle     3  Before raising the vehicle  use the wheel bolt wrench  to loosen  but not remove  the wheel bolts on the  wheel with the flat tire  Turn the wheel bolts counter   clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the  ground     a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299       Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location  NOTE  There are front and rear jacking locations on each  side of the body  as indicated by the traingular lift point  symbols on the sill molding      300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN    4     Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to  the flat tire  
64.  pressure is 27 psi  186 kPa    a temperature drop to 20   E   7   C  will decrease the tire  pressure to approximately 23 psi  159 kPa   This tire  pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire  Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light  Driving the vehicle  may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately  27 psi  186 kPa   but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale  Light will still be on  In this situation  the Tire Pressure  Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires  are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pres   sure value     268 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    CAUTION  NOTE      The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care    e The TPMS has been optimized for the original  equipment tires and wheels  TPMS pressures and  warnings have been established for the tire size  equipped on your vehicle  Undesirable system op   eration or sensor damage may result when using  replacement equipment that is not of the same size   type  and or style  Aftermarket wheels can cause    sensor damage  Do not use aftermarket tire sealants  or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a  TPMS  as damage to the sensors may result    After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure   always reinstall the valve stem cap  This will  prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve  stem  which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni   toring Sensor        and maintenance  or to provide warning of a tire  failure or condition     The TPMS should not b
65.  programmed HomeLink   button    and observe the indicator light    e If the indicator light stays on constantly  program   ming is complete and the garage door device should  activate when the HomeLink   button is pressed    e To program the remaining two HomeLink   buttons   repeat each step for each remaining button  DO NOT  erase the channels        3  Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink   Reprogrameung A Single HomeHinko Button    button you want to program and the hand held trans   mitter button     To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained   follow these steps     1  Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     2  Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until  the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds   Do not release the button     4  Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi   cator light  HomeLink   indicator will flash slowly  and then rapidly after HomeLink   has received the  frequency signal from the hand held transmitter  Re   lease both buttons after the indicator light changes 3      Without releasing the button proceed with  Program   from slow to rapid     ming A Non Rolling Code  Step 2 and follow all  remaining steps     134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In    Canadian Gate Operator Programming    For programming transmitters in Canada  United States  that require the transmitter signals to    time out    after  several seconds of transmission     Canadian radio frequency laws require transmit
66.  properly  The TPMS malfunction indicator is  combined with the low tire pressure telltale  When the  system detects a malfunction  the telltale will flash for  approximately one minute and then remain continuously  illuminated  This sequence will continue upon subse   quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists   When the malfunction indicator is illuminated  the sys   tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure  as intended  TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety  of reasons  including the installation of replacement or  alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the  TPMS from functioning properly  Always check the  TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more  tires or wheels on your vehicle  to ensure that the  replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS  to continue to function properly     CAUTION     The TPMS has been optimized for the original  equipment tires and wheels  TPMS pressures and  warning have been established for the tire size  equipped on your vehicle  Undesirable system opera     tion or sensor damage may result when using re   placement equipment that is not of the same size   type  and or style  Aftermarket wheels can cause  sensor damage  Do not use tire sealant from a can or  balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a  TPMS  as damage to the sensors may result        24  Glow Plug Light     If Equipped    DO This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the   ambient temperature 
67.  speed by pushing the RES     button  If the button  is continually pressed  the set speed will continue to  increase until the button is released  then the new set  speed will be established     Pressing the RES     button once will result in a 1 mph   1 6 km h  increase in set speed  Each subsequent tap of  the button results in an increase of 1 mph  1 6 km h      To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is  set  push the SET     button  If the button is continually  held in the SET     position  the set speed will continue to  decrease until the button is released  Release the button  when the desired speed is reached  and the new set speed  will be established     Pressing the SET     button once will result in a 1 mph   1 6 km h  decrease in set speed  Each subsequent tap of  the button results in a decrease of 1 mph  1 6 km h      To Accelerate For Passing    Press the accelerator as you would normally  When the  pedal is released  the vehicle will return to the set speed        120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In    Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills    The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the  vehicle set speed     NOTE  The Electronic Speed Control system maintains  speed up and down hills  A slight speed change on  moderate hills is normal     On steep hills  a greater speed loss or gain may occur so  it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed  Control     WARNING     Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous
68.  such objects  could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision  severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate         Continued     THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43    Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags  SAB  When the air bag deploys  it opens the seam between the  front and side of the seat s trim cover  Each air bag  deploys independently  a left side impact deploys the left  air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air  bag only        Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags  SAB  provide  enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a  side impact  The SAB are marked with an air bag label  sewn into the outboard side of the front seats        Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain   SABIC     Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains  SABIC   may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat  outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the  body structure  Each air bag features inflated chambers   placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant   that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries   The SABIC deploy downward  covering both windows  on the impact side        Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags  SAB  Label    44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM                   Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain  SABIC   Label Location    NOTE  Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior  trim  but they will open during air bag deployment     The system includes 
69.  system turns on                 e Inspect exhaust system        e Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or  off road conditions                 e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as  required        e Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped  with dipstick     M  A     N  T  E  N  A  N   e  E  S   e  H  E  D  U  L  E  S  8                                        UN 366 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES IN   A A   W Maintenance Chart   N Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals    E   N Mileage or time passed  o   o  o oe o  eo o o s S 8 3 3 8   A  whichever comes first    9  3  3 3 S3 3 1858 2 S 2  8 8   amp 8      R amp I ISIS 5 8 EI sss assis a   E Or Years  2   3 4  5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15  i   o o e e e   s oem 3188 88 58 8588 58 8 8 8 8   H Jl zll SF ET E ses Sa sg   E e         o ye   y    T  b N N N   fj   Additional Inspections   WE   Inspect the CV joints  X X X X X   E Inspect front suspension    FS   tie rod ends and boot seals  X X X X X X X   8 and replace if necessary    Inspect the brake linings  X X X X X X X  parking brake function                                                                                   a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 367    A  Mileage or time passed o   o   o o eo o o o S 2 2 2 2 2 l   whichever comes first   9  31 3 8 8 8  8 8 S S S S S S i   ala v iBooc RFI S9 S 9 9r s9o sz n     Or Years    2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15    Or Kilometers  2 2  gt      2 2 2 
70.  the UP A or DOWN V button to select speed  limit activation  On  or deactivation  Off      3  When the function is activated  On   briefly press the  MENU button to display the presently set_activation  speed  Pressing the UP or DOWN buttons  selects the speed limit  Press MENU to confirm selec   tion     NOTE  Selection is possible between 20 and 125 mph  or km h  depending on the selected unit  The setting will  increase   decrease by five units each time the UP DOWN    button is pressed  Press and hold the UP DOWN button   to increase   decrease the setting rapidly  Save the setting   by briefly pressing the button when you approach the  required setting      Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu  screen  or press and hold the MENU button  approxi   mately one second  to go back to the main screen  without storing the settings     To cancel the setting  proceed as follows    1  Briefly press the MENU button     On    will flash on the  display    2  Press the DOWN V button     Off    will flash on the  display     3  Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu  screen  or press and hold the MENU button  approxi   mately one second  to go back to the main screen  without storing the settings     a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175    Speed Display    When this function is activated the cluster will display  the vehicle speed  MPH or km h      To activate  On  or to deactivate  Off  the speed display  feature  proceed as follows     1     Brief
71.  the instrument panel  separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to  their full size  The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to  70 milliseconds  This is about half of the time it takes to  blink your eyes  The air bags then quickly deflate while  helping to restrain the driver and front passenger     The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the  vent holes in the sides of the air bag  In this way  the air  bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49    Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator  Unit    The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is  located under the instrument panel trim beneath the  steering column  When the ORC detects a collision  requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags  it signals the  inflator units  A large quantity of non toxic gas is gener   ated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air  Bag  The trim cover separates and folds out of the way  allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size  The air bag  fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds  The Supple   mental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through  small vent holes in the side of the air bag     Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag  SAB   Inflator Units    The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags  SAB  are  designed to activate only in certain side collisions     The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air  bags to inflate  based on the severity and type of co
72.  they wear at  unequal rates     These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires   The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with  aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type  tires  Rotation will increase tread life  help to maintain  mud  snow and wet traction levels  and contribute to a  smooth  quiet ride     Refer to the    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper  maintenance intervals  The reasons for any rapid or  unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being  performed     266 STARTING AND OPERATING    The suggested rotation method is the    rearward cross     shown in the following diagram  This rotation pattern  does not apply to some directional tires that must not be  reversed     E  ES    a  Y  gt 8    055707139    Tire Rotation       TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM  TPMS     The Tire Pressure Monitor System  TPMS  will warn the  driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom   mended cold tire pressure     The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about  1 psi  6 9 kPa  for every 12   F  6 5  C   This means that  when the outside temperature decreases  the tire pressure  will decrease  Tire pressure should always be set based  on cold inflation tire pressure  This is defined as the tire  pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least  three hours  or driven less than 1 mile  1 6 km  after a  three hour period  The cold tire inflation pressure must  not exceed the maximum inflation pressure mo
73.  trailer tow  extremely hot  or cold ambient temperatures  and E85 fuel usage will  influence when the    Change Oil    or    Oil Change Re   quired    message is displayed  Severe Operating Condi   tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate  as early as 3 500 miles  5 600 km  since last reset  Have  your vehicle serviced as soon as possible  within the next  500 miles  805 km      NOTE  Under no circumstances should oil change inter   vals exceed 10 000 miles  16 000 km  or twelve months   whichever comes first     Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip     Check engine oil level    Check windshield washer fluid level      Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual  wear or damage    Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir  brake  master cylinder reservoir  and transmission as needed      Check function of all interior and exterior lights    a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365          Required Maintenance Intervals  At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By   Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following Oil Change Indicator System    page for the required maintenance intervals  e Inspect brake pads  shoes  rotors  drums  and  hoses           At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By    7   e Inspect engine cooling system protection and  Oil Change Indicator System     hoses    e Change oil and filter  e Check and adjust hand brake    e Rotate the tires  Rotate at the first sign of irregu   lar wear  even if it occurs before the oil indicator 
74.  two minutes  Each time the lever  is pulled  the activation of the lights will be extended by  30 seconds  The activation of the lights can be extended to  a maximum of 210 seconds        UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109    Deactivation Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console   press the switch to the on right position from its center  position and the lights are always on     Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel  and hold it for more than two seconds     Front Fog Lights     If Equipped    FO The fog light switch is located on the center stack   of the instrument panel  just below the radio   Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on  Press  the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off     Interior Lights    The interior light switches are located in the overhead  console  The interior lights can be set to three different  positions  Off  Left Position  Center Position  On Right  Position         On Right Position       110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE    Press the switch to the off left position from its center  position and the lights are always off        Center Position    The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead   Off Left Position console controls the map or reading function of the lights    Leave the switch in the center position  and the lights are Press the switch to the right to turn on the right light and  turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed  pr
75.  vehicle are buckled up properly        32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    WARNING     In a collision  you and your passengers can suffer  much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled    up  You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other  passengers  or you can be thrown out of the vehicle   Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are  buckled up properly     Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver  even  on short trips  Someone on the road may be a poor driver  and cause a collision that includes you  This can happen  far away from home or on your own street     Research has shown that seat belts save lives  and they  can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision   Some of the worst injuries happen when people are  thrown from the vehicle  Seat belts reduce the possibility       of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the  inside of the vehicle  Everyone in a motor vehicle should  be belted at all times     Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions    1  Enter the vehicle and close the door  Sit back and  adjust the seat     2  The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the  back of your seat  Grasp the latch plate and pull out  the belt  Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as  necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap     3  When the belt is long enough to fit  insert the latch  plate into the buckle until you hear a    click        a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICL
76.  where the  system cannot maintain a constant speed  Your ve     hicle could go too fast for the conditions  and you  could lose control and have an accident  Do not use  Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads  that are winding  icy  snow covered or slippery        REAR PARK ASSIST     IF EQUIPPED    The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indica   tion of the distance between the rear fascia bumper and  a detected obstacle when backing up  e g  during a  parking maneuver  Refer to the    Park Assist System  Usage Precautions    for the limitations of this system and  recommendations     Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the  transmission is placed into REVERSE  As the distance  from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases  the au   dible alert becomes more frequent     Interaction With Trailer Towing    The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated  when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle  The system will be  automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed     a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121    Rear Park Assist Sensors    The four Rear Park Assist sensors  located in the rear  fascia bumper  monitor the area behind the vehicle that  is within the sensors    field of view  The sensors can detect  obstacles  in the horizontal direction  from approximately  12 in  30 cm  up to 55 in  140 cm  from the center of the  rear fascia bumper and up to 24 in  60 cm  from the  comers of the rear fascia bumper  
77.  will be switched OFF     NOTE  If the key is not inserted in the ignition switch   but is inside the vehicle  the system does not recognize  the presence of the key and after the closing of last door   the vehicle remains locked     Auto     Relocking  Only For Rear Doors     With the vehicle locked and all doors closed  LED ON    if a passenger opens one of the rear doors  LED OFF    as soon as the door is closed  it will be locked again  LED  ON      Child Protection Door Lock System     Rear Doors    To provide a safer environment for small children riding  in the rear seats  the rear doors are equipped with  Child Protection Door Lock system    To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection  Door Lock System    1  Open the rear door     2  Insert the tip of the key into the lock and rotate  clockwise to the LOCK position or counter clockwise  to UNLOCK position     3  Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door     WARNING     Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision     Remember that the rear doors can only be opened  from the outside when the Child Protection locks are  engaged  locked         24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE    NOTE  For emergency exit from the rear seats when the  Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged  unlock  the doors using the central unlock button  roll down the  window and open the door using the exterior handle     POWER WINDOWS  Power Window Switches    The power window controls are located on the driver   s  doo
78. 2 Volts  Do not allow cable    clamps to touch each other    e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can  burn or even blind you  Do not allow battery fluid  to contact your eyes  skin  or clothing  Do not lean    e Battery posts  terminals  and related accessories  contain lead and lead compounds  Wash hands  after handling      The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that  should not be disconnected and should only be  replaced with a battery of the same type  vented      over a battery when attaching clamps  If acid  splashes in eyes or on skin  flush the area imme   diately with large amounts of water  Refer to   Jump Starting Procedures  in  What To Do In  Emergencies  for further information         Continued     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321    CAUTION     e It is essential when replacing the cables on the  battery that the positive cable is attached to the  positive post and the negative cable is attached to  the negative post  Battery posts are marked positive      and negative     and are identified on the    battery case  Cable clamps should be tight on the  terminal posts and free of corrosion    e If a    fast charger    is used while the battery is in  the vehicle  disconnect both vehicle battery cables  before connecting the charger to the battery  Do not  use a    fast charger    to provide starting voltage        Air Conditioner Maintenance    For best possible performance  your air conditioner  should be checked and serviced by an authorized st
79. 20274421    Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With  Mechanical Key Release Button    NOTE  The line of transmission must not be blocked with  metal objects     To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate    Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE  transmitter once to unlock the driver   s door or twice   within five seconds  to unlock all doors and the liftgate   The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the  unlock signal  The illuminated entry system will also  turn on     To Lock The Doors And Liftgate    Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit   ter to lock all doors and the liftgate  The turn signal lights  will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the  signal  If a door is ajar the turn signal lights will flash at  an increased rate and there will be no horn chirp  this is  to indicate that a door is still ajar     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19    Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote  Control    To replace the battery  proceed as follows   e press button A fig  16 and open the metal insert B   e turn the screw C to Unlock using a fine bit screwdriver     e take out the battery case D and replace the battery E  making sure that polarities are correct     e refit the battery case D inside the key and lock it turning  the screw C to Lock     NOTE  Used batteries should be disposed of  as specified  by law  in the special containers  otherwise take them to  an authorized studio  which will deal with their disposal        Fi
80. 272 STARTING AND OPERATING  General Information  This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and    RSS 210 of Industry Canada  Operation is subject to the  following conditions     e This device may not cause harmful interference     e This device must accept any interference received   including interference that may cause undesired  operation     The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the  following licenses        MRXC4W4MA4  2546A CAWAMAA    United States  Canada                 Single           FUEL REQUIREMENTS   1 4L Turbo    This engine is designed to meet all emission  regulations and provide satisfactory fuel  economy and performance when using  high quality unleaded  regular  gasoline   diab having an octane rating of 87  For optimum  performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or  higher is recommended        Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to  your engine  However  continued heavy spark knock at  high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is  required     A STARTING AND OPERATING 273    Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard  starting  stalling and hesitations  If you experience these  symptoms  try another brand of gasoline  with the appro   priate octane rating for your engine  before considering  service for the vehicle     Reformulated Gasoline    Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner  burning gasoline referred to as    Reformulated Gasoline      Reformulated gasolines conta
81. ACK UP CAMERA       IF EQUIPPED   suecos erem eG Pee baie 126  Turning ParkView   On Or Off     With    connectQ 5 0 eiie sie i aam aida eee 128    a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83                         Turning ParkView   On Or Off     With ll POWER SUNROOF     IF EQUIPPED          138  Uconnect   6 5 6 5N          esee 128 To Open  s c eese era ee ud 139  Tuning Camera Delay On Or Ome ooa des 128 To CUBS x cusa ra pad doe 139          W GARAGE POOR OPENER   IE EOENERED ea  Wind Buffeting    0 0 0    0  cece eee    Power Sun Blind                         Before You Begin Programming HomeLink        130             Programming A Rolling Code              130                                                                E POWER OUTLETS           00  cece cues 140  Programming A Non Rolling Code           133 M CIGAR LIGHTER     IF EQUIPPED            142  Ea Sate OOO es 134 W CUPHOLDERS         eee 143  CO io ig ibm dut 135 W STORAGE ooo 144  x mba a E ne Glovebox Storage     ada cei rer aed 144  Troubleshooting Tips          oo o ooooo     136 Front Center Armrest Storage     If Equipped     145  General Information                      137    E CARGO AREA FEATURES              0    146    84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II  ll REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES          146 M ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED        148    MW REAR WINDOW FEATURES                147  Rear Window Defroster                   147                a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
82. AE 5W 40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for  all operating temperatures  This engine oil improves low  temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy     Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi   fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num   ber should not be used     The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended  engine oil viscosity for your engine  For information on  engine oil filler cap location  refer to    Engine Compart   ment    in    Maintaining Your Vehicle    for further informa   tion     Materials Added To Engine Oil    The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi   tion of any additives  other than leak detection dyes  to the  engine oil  Engine oil is an engineered product and its  performance may be impaired by supplemental additives     Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters    Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and  oil filters from your vehicle  Used oil and oil filters   indiscriminately discarded  can present a problem to the  environment  Contact your authorized studio  service  station or governmental agency for advice on how and  where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in  your area     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319    Engine Oil Filter    The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter  at every engine oil change     Engine Oil Filter Selection    This manufacturer   s engines have a full flow type dispos   able oil filter  Use a filter of this type 
83. Alert   is a feature intended to remind the driver and  front passenger  if equipped with front passenger  BeltAlert    to fasten their seat belts  The feature is active  whenever the ignition is on  If the driver or front seat  passenger is unbelted  the Seat Belt Reminder Light will  turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are  fastened     The BeltAlert   warning sequence begins after the vehicle  speed is over 6 mph  10 km h   by blinking the Seat Belt  Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime   Once the sequence starts  it will continue for the entire  duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened   After the sequence completes  the Seat Belt Reminder  Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts    are fastened  The driver should instruct all other occu   pants to fasten their seat belts  If a front seat belt is  unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 6 mph   10 km h   BeltAlert   will provide both audio and visual  notification     The front passenger seat BeltAlert   is not active when  the front passenger seat is unoccupied  BeltAlert   may  be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the  front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat  if  equipped   It is recommended that pets be restrained in  the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are  secured by seat belts  and cargo is properly stowed     BeltAlert   can be enabled or disabled by your autho   rized studio  FIAT Group Automobiles does n
84. Bell Relay Service operator     Service Contract    You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle  to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected  repairs after the manufacturer   s New Vehicle Limited    IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN    Warranty expires  The manufacturer stands behind only  the manufacturer   s service contracts  If you purchased  a manufacturer   s service contract  you will receive Plan  Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the  mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date   If you have any questions about the service contract  call  the manufacturer   s Service Contract National Customer  Hotline at 1 800 521 9922  Canadian residents  call  800   465 2001 English    800  387 9983 French      The manufacturer will not stand behind any service  contract that is not the manufacturer   s service contract   It is not responsible for any service contract other than  the manufacturer   s service contract  If you purchased a  service contract that is not a manufacturer   s service  contract  and you require service after the manufacturer   s  New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires  please refer to the  contract documents  and contact the person listed in  those documents     a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 375    We appreciate that you have made a major investment  when you purchased the vehicle  An authorized studio  has also made a major investment in facilities  tools  and  training to assure that you are absolutely deligh
85. E 33    WARNING  WARNING   Continued     e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect  you from injury during a collision  You are more    e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect  you properly  The lap portion could ride too high on  your body  possibly causing internal injuries  Al   ways buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you    e A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly   In a sudden stop you could move too far forward  4  increasing the possibility of injury  Wear your seat    likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not  wear your shoulder belt  The lap and shoulder belt  are meant to be used together          Position the lap belt across your thighs  below your  abdomen  To remove slack in the lap belt portion  pull  up on the shoulder belt  To loosen the lap belt if it is  too tight  tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt   A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in  a collision     belt snugly    e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous   Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the  vehicle in a collision  increasing head and neck  injury  A belt worn under the arm can cause internal  injuries  Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones   Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron   gest bones will take the force in a collision         Continued     34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN    WARNING     e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of  internal 
86. EFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    Along with seat belts and pretensioners  Advanced Front  Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee  Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide  improved protection for the driver and front passenger   Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve  occupant protection     Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls  Occupant Restraint Controller  ORC     The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system  required for this vehicle     The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or  side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required   Based on the impact sensor s signals  a central electronic  ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags  Supplemen   tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag  Supplemental Side Air Bag  Inflatable Curtain  SABIC   Supplemental Seat Mounted  Side Air Bags  SAB   and front seat belt pretensioners  as    required  depending on several factors  including the  severity and type of impact     Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side  Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec   tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal  collisions depending on several factors  including the  severity and type of collision  Advanced Front Air Bags  are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear or side  collisions     The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver  Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions   including some that may produce substan
87. ESCRIPTION  AUTOSTICK NOT AutoStick   mode is REDUCE GEAR The transmission pump is  AVAILABLE unavailable due to a shift CHANGES overheating  In AutoStick    lever fault  See your autho  mode  try to drive in one  rized studio for diagnosis specific gear as much as  and service  possible  avoiding frequent  AUTOMATIC MODE   The transmission is unable gear changes  In DRIVE   NOT AVAILABLE          to shift itself automatically   due to a fault condition   Use the AutoStick   mode to  shift the transmission  manually  See your autho   rized studio for diagnosis  and service        the transmission will  automatically modify its  shift schedule to reduce the  number of shifts                 A STARTING AND OPERATING 225  DESCRIPTION                               MESSAGE DESCRIPTION MESSAGE  TRANS  GETTING The transmission driving SERVICE A transmission fault has  HOT PRESS BRAKE clutch is overheating  TRANSMISSION been detected  See your  usually due to repeated authorized studio for  launches in stop and go diagnosis and service   traffic  Pull over and allow SERVICE SHIFTER   A shift lever fault has been  the transmission to cool in detected  See your autho   NEUTRAL until    TRANS  rized studio for diagnosis  COOL READY TO DRIVE and service   UE Equipped   IS displayed  ENGAGE PARK The sensor that confirms  TRANS  HOT STOP The transmission driving BRAKE PARK engagement is  SAFELY SHIFT TO P clutch has overheated  not functioning properly   Pull over and shift the Engage the 
88. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CA 4N109268                                      811b5a9a    Tire and Loading Information Placard    This placard tells you important information about the   1  number of people that can be carried in the vehicle       2  total weight your vehicle can carry    B Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information  Placard    A STARTING AND OPERATING 251    3  tire size designed for your vehicle    4  cold tire inflation pressures for the front  rear  and  Spare tires     Loading    The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed  the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle  You  will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you  adhere to the loading conditions  tire size  and cold tire  inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading  Information placard and in the    Vehicle Loading    section  of this manual     NOTE  Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition   gross axle weight ratings  GAWRs  for the front and rear  axles must not be exceeded  For further information on  GAWRs  vehicle loading  and trailer towing  refer to   Vehicle Loading  in this section     To determine the maximum loading conditions of your  vehicle  locate the statement  The combined weight of  occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or  XXX kg  on the Tire and Loading Information placard   The combined weight of occupants  cargo luggage and  trailer tongue weight  if applicable  should never exceed  the weight referenced here     Steps Fo
89. G YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    Trip Functions   Both trip functions are resettable  reset     start of new  trip        Trip A    can be used to display the figures relating to   e Trip distance A   e Average consumption   e Instant consumption A   e Average speed A   e Travel time A  driving time     Trip B    can be used to display the figures relating to   e Trip distance B   e Average consumption B   e Average speed B    e Travel time B  driving time      NOTE     Trip B    functions may be excluded  see    Trip B  Data         Range    and    Instantaneous consumption    can   not be reset     Values Displayed  Range    This indicates the distance which may be travelled with  the fuel remaining in the tank  assuming that driving  conditions will not change  The message           will  appear on the display in the following cases     e Distance less than 30 miles  or 50 km        The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine  running     NOTE  The range depends on several factors  driving  style  type of route  freeway  residential  mountain roads   etc    conditions of use of the car  load  tire pressure  etc     Trip planning must take into account the above notes     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173    Distance Travelled  This value shows the distance covered since the last reset   Average Consumption    This value shows the approximate average consumption  since the last reset     Instant Consumption    This indicates the fuel consumption  The value is
90. H Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle       What is the weight limit  child   s  weight   weight of the child restraint   for using the LATCH anchorage  system to attach the child restraint     Can the LATCH anchorages and the    65 Ibs  29 5 kg     Use the LATCH anchorage system  until the combined weight of the  child and the child restraint is 65 lbs   29 5 kg   Use the seat belt and tether  anchor instead of the LATCH system  once the combined weight is more  than 65 Ibs  29 5 kg         seat belt be used together to attach a  rear facing or forward facing  child restraint     Can a child seat be installed in the    Do not use the seat belt when you use   the LATCH anchorage system to attach   a rear facing or forward facing  child restraint        center position using the inner  LATCH lower anchorages        N A          66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In       Can two child restraints be attached  using a common lower LATCH  anchorage     No    Never    share    a LATCH anchorage  with two or more child restraints   If the center position does not have  dedicated LATCH lower anchorages   use the seat belt to install a child seat  in the center position next to a child  seat using the LATCH anchorages in  an outboard position        Can the rear facing child restraint  touch the back of the front  passenger seat     Yes    The child seat may touch the back of  the front passenger seat if the child  restraint manufacturer also allows 
91. INCH   the buckle stalk may be  twisted up to 3 full turns  Do not twist  the buckle stalk in a seating position       with an ALR retractor              72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II    Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable  Automatic Locking Retractor  ALR     1     Place the child seat in the center of the seating  position  For some second row seats  you may need to  recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a  better fit       Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor    to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint   Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path       Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a       click          Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight    against the child seat     5  To lock the seat belt  pull down on the shoulder part of    the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing  out of the retractor  Then  allow the webbing to retract  back into the retractor  As the webbing retracts  you  will hear a clicking sound  This means the seat belt is  now in the Automatic Locking mode       Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor  If it is    locked  you should not be able to pull out any web   bing  If the retractor is not locked  repeat step 5       Finally  pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the    lap portion around the child restraint while you push  the child restraint rearward and downward into the  vehicle seat     a THINGS TO KN
92. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357                      Bulb Number 4  Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place   Rear Fog Lamps   W16W 5  Reinstall the plastic cap   ud Fqmpped Front Turn Signal  Parking And Daytime Running  License Plate Lamps W5W Lamps  NOTE  Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that 1  Turn front wheels inboard to access upper cover in  can be purchased from your authorized studio  wheel liner   If a bulb needs to be replaced  visit your authorized 2  Open the upper cover on the front of the wheel liner           studio or refer to the applicable Service Manual        3  Remove the cap from the back of the lower headlamp    BULB REPLACEMENT housing    Headlamps 4  Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove    1  Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp 5  Install the bulb into socket  and rotate bulb socket a  housing  clockwise into lamp locking it in place    2  Rotate the bulb counter clockwise  6  Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the    3  Remove the bulb and replace as needed  a    358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Front Fog Lamps  To replace the front fog lights  see your authorized studio   Front Rear Side Marker Lamps    The front rear side marker lamps are LED and not serviced  separately  See your authorized studio for replacement of  these lights     Rear Tail  Stop  Backup And Turn Signal Lamps  1  Open the liftgate     2  Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp  assembly     3  Remove the four s
93. OUGH WATER               230 Electronic Stability Control  ESC             239  Flowing Rising Water        o ooo oo ooo     230 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light  Shallow Standing Water    cce e 230 And ESC OFF Indicator Light              240   E ELECTRIC POWER STEERING                232 Electronic Roll Mitigation  ERM             243   E PARKING BRAKE             00000 00005 232 Wi TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION               244   M BRAKE SYSTEM ooo 234 Tire Markings      16    nne 244  Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System  ABS       234 Tire Identification Number  TIN             247   E ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM       236 Tire Terminology And Definitions           249  Anti Lock Brake System  ABS               236 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure             250  Brake Assist System  BAS                  236    A STARTING AND OPERATING 207                                                 E TIRES     GENERAL INFORMATION           254 Life Of Tire   ise yemas 261  Tire Pressure   1 1    ee ee 254 Replacement Tires       oooooooooomoo     262  Tire Inflation Pressures                   255 M TIRECHAINS                   00005  264  Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation     257 M TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS       265  Radial Ply Tires         oo o ooooo ooo    257 W TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING  All Season Tires     If Equipped              258 O ES                Summer Or Three Season Tires     If Equipped     258 Maa c E             General Information                
94. OUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155    4  Electronic Stability Control OFF  ESC OFF  Indicator  Light    ESC  This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con   OFF trol system  ESC  has been turned off by the    driver   5  Electronic Stability Control  ESC  Activation    Malfunction Indicator Light    The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator   ESC Light in the instrument cluster will come on for   four seconds when the ignition switch is   turned to the ON RUN position  If the ESC   Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on con    tinuously with the engine running  a malfunction has   been detected in the ESC system  If this light remains on    see your authorized studio as soon as possible to have the  problem diagnosed and corrected     156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light starts to  flash as soon as the ESC system or TCS system become  active     NOTE     The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation   Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each  time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN     Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN  the ESC  system will be on  even if it was turned off previously     6  Brake Warning Light    This light monitors various brake functions   including brake fluid level and parking brake  application  If the Brake Warning Light turns  on it may indicate that the parking brake is  applied  that the brake fluid level is low  or that there is  a problem with the brake system 
95. OUR VEHICLE IM  Sun Visor    Slide On Rod    Feature SEATS    The sun visor    Slide On Rod    feature allows for additional Front Seats    flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun   mee pem Front Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment    To use the    Slide On Rod    feature  rotate the sun visor  downward and unclip it  Pull the sun visor along the   Slide On Rod  until the sun visor is in the desired position     The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats  near  the floor     While sitting in the seat  lift up on the bar and move the  seat forward or rearward  Release the bar once the  desired position is reached  Then  using body pressure   move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that  the seat adjusters have latched         Slide On Rod  Feature       UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91    WARNING     e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous   Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of  control which could cause a collision and serious  injury or death     e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat  belts and while the vehicle is parked  Serious  injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted  seat belt        Adjusting Bar    92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II  Seat Height Adjustment Recliner Adjustment    The seat height adjustment lever is located on the out  The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the  board side of the seat  Pull upward on the lever to raise seat  
96. OW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73    8     If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the    Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether    seating position has a top tether anchorage  connect Anchorage    the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether  strap  Refer to    Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil   dren  LATCH  Restraint System    for directions to  attach a tether anchor       Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by    pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt  path  It should not move more than 1 inch  25 4 mm   in any direction     Any seat belt system will loosen with time  so check the  belt occasionally  and pull it tight if necessary     1  Look behind the seating position where you plan to    install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage   You may need to move the seat forward to provide  better access to the tether anchorage  If there is no top  tether anchorage for that seating position  see the  charts above   move the child restraint to another  position in the vehicle if one is available       Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path    for the strap between the anchor and the child seat   If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head  restraints  raise the head restraint  and where possible   route the tether strap under the head restraint and  between the two posts  If not possible  lower the head  restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard  side of the head 
97. Push the window switch down firmly to the second  detent to open the window completely and continue  to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds  after the window is fully open     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27    LIFTGATE Gas props support the liftgate in the open position   However  because the gas pressure drops with tempera   ture  it may be necessary to assist the props when  opening the liftgate in cold weather     To unlock the liftgate  use the Remote Keyless Entry   RKE  transmitter or activate the central locking button  located on the instrument panel below the radio     To open the liftgate  press the liftgate electronic release Lingate Emergency Helbase    and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion  As a security measure  a Liftgate Emergency Release is  built into the liftgate latching mechanism  To access the    WARNING  Liftgate Emergency Release proceed as follows     e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous 1  Remove the rear headrests and fold down the seats    exhaust gases into your vehicle  You and your pas  completely    sengers could be injured by these fumes  Keep the   9 Take the screwdriver from the tool box supplied    liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle    e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open   make sure that all windows are closed  and the  climate control blower switch is set at high speed   Do not use the recirculation mode           28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
98. RI RES 294   Jump Starting        ooooooooooooooooo   302   TOWING  aria iiaea aasa a eed ee 309    Emergency Trunk Release             o o o o oo o   27    Engine  Air Cleaner             iane dita ens 319  Break In Recommendations            o  o o o   75  Checking Oil Level   eae e RU eda 316  Compartment ws iria rer eds 313  Cooling  sio scan camara aine na deba REOR qee a 332  Exhaust Gas Caution             0 0000 o    76  Fails to Start             ee Eii 211  Flooded  Starting       ooooooooooooomoo     211  Fuel Requirements              0 00000005 272  Qul sheen od thd pe whe REI Pha ene heed 316  Oil Filler Cap is sss baie ita ee oe 318  Oil Selector  aaa ania Aw sae RO a Da 317  Overheaung    ico eade hone eae RR REUS 283  Startihg   c see gu sme Re eR Eds 209  Temperature Gauge    6    0    eee eee ee 157   Enhanced Accident Response Feature             51   Event Data Recorder           0 000 cee ee eens 56       386 INDEX IN    Exhaust Gas Caution            o    cee eae 27  Exhaust System  sis caidas ad Meera ola ae 76  Exterior Lights  seric aria rio io tS 80  Filler Location Fuel                         157  Filters   Air Cleaner 2 0 0 0    cc ens 319   Air Conditioning             0 0    00000  323   Engine Fuel vacas a Bee om Eo iw ta Bigs 360   Engine Oil i030 ane turp i Re Ras 319   Engine Oil Disposal          ooooooomoo    318  Flashers   Turn Signal  corista as eae pes y Bee 80  Flooded Engine Starting          oo o ooooooo     211  Fluid  Brake  soci
99. Recirculation Control button     When the On Off button is pressed  the climate control  system automatically activates internal air recirculation   LED on Recirculation Control button on      It is still possible to activate outside air recirculation  LED  on the button off   and vice versa  by pressing the  Recirculation Control button     In automatic operation  recirculation is managed auto   matically by the system according to outside environ   mental conditions     200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN    NOTE       The engagement of the recirculation system makes it  possible to reach the required heating cooling condi   tions faster  It is  however  inadvisable to use it on  rainy cold days as it would considerably increase the  possibility of the windows misting up inside  espe   cially if the climate control system is off    When the  outside temperature is low  recirculation is forced off   air drawn in from the outside  to prevent the win   dows from misting up     e It is inadvisable to use internal air recirculation when  the outside temperature is low  since the windows  could mist up rapidly     Climate Control System Compressor    Press the A C Control button to activate deactivate the  compressor  activation is indicated by the LED on the  button switching on      The system remembers that the compressor has been  switched off  even after the engine has stopped     When the compressor is switched off  the system deacti   vates air recirculation to prev
100. To recline the seat  lean forward slightly  lift the  the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower lever  lean back to the desired position and release the  the seat height  lever  To return the seatback to its normal upright posi   tion  lean forward and lift the lever  Release the lever  once the seatback is in the upright position        Height Adjustment Lever    UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93    WARNING     e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is  dangerous  The sudden movement of the seat could  cause you to lose control  The seat belt might not be    adjusted properly and you could be injured  Adjust  the seat only while the vehicle is parked      Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the  shoulder belt is no longer resting against your  chest  In a collision you could slide under the seat  belt and be seriously or even fatally injured  Use  the recliner only when the vehicle is parked        Recline Lever    94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  Power Lumbar     If Equipped       Press the power lumbar switch to adjust the lumbar  support  Release the switch when you reach the desired  position              A     Power Lumbar Switch  B     Heated Seat Switch       UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95    Heated Seats     If Equipped    On some models  the front driver and passenger seats  may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions  and seatbacks  The controls for the front heated seats are  locat
101. Tumble Rear                      98  Reclining PPP  92  Security Alarm  Theft AlarM                    15  Sentry Key  Immobilizer                       13  Service Assistance         ee ess 372  Service Gontract o  sss kc sora 374  Service Engine Soon Light  Malfunction Indicator     161  Service Manuals            o ooo    ee 376  Shift Lever Override             lesen 308    Side Airbag    signals  TUM    4 o erae em a 80  Snow Chains  Tire Chains            o  o  ooo   264  Snow DIES viaria over ee eee 258  Spare Fre  a tas weg cete Rd E a Rede alada 259  Spark Plugs ici ee eR RR Ree ewe ee 360  Speed Control  Cruise Control                   117  Speedometer       i bessere eed 155  DLartng sce dade ted halt eed agde med s 209  Automatic Transmission               ss  209  Cold Weather     2 0 0 0    000000000000  210  Engine Fails to Start    1 2    0 0 0 0  aa ee 211  Manual Transmission                  00  209  Steering  Tilt Column  os o eg ees abies aaa ge aoe 116  Wheel Tilt cansa e 116  Steering Wheel Audio Controls                 182  Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls     182  Storage OI  355  Storage  Vehicle    4 ese dore eaa deoa 355    A INDEX 393    storing  Your Vehicle  is dens sor ddan eneas 355  Stuck  FROIN Gs   c cester ahd Ron er OR RS daba 306  Studio Service  iisdem b erred Rn eee 315  Sun ROO  ee aC vs 138  Sun Visor Extension           llle es 90  Supplemental Restraint System   Airbag           39  Tachometer    i   dry px e n Ex REX
102. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly  engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill  flange  centering the jack saddle between the locating  notches on the sill flange       Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire  and install the spare tire     WARNING     6    Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make    the vehicle less stable  It could slip off the jack and  hurt someone near it  Raise the vehicle only enough  to remove the tire          Remove the wheel bolts and tire     7      Mount the spare tire     CAUTION     Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem    facing outward  The vehicle could be damaged if the  spare tire is mounted incorrectly        NOTE     For vehicles so equipped  do not attempt to install a  center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare     Refer to    Compact Spare Tire    and to    Limited Use  Spare    under    Tires   General Information    in    Start   ing and Operating    for additional warnings  cautions   and information about the spare tire  its use  and  operation     A WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301    8  Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the 10  Finish tightening the wheel bolts  Push down on  wheel bolt toward the wheel  Lightly tighten the the wrench while at the end of the handle for  wheel bolts  increased leverage  Tighten the wheel bolts in a star   pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened   twice  The correct tightness of each wheel bolt is   95 ft lb   128 N m  
103. Vae PUR rra 359  Disposal 2 siestis stas e E eg LR eR Een 336   Anti Lock Brake System  ABS          o o o o o o    234   Anti Lock Warning Light                     165   Anti Theft Security Alarm  Theft Alarm            15   Appearatice Care  14i awe ee bh e 343   Arming Theft System  Security Alarm             15   Automatic Dimming Mirror                  0  86   Automatic Transmission               00000  214  Adding EIuid morra rar 342  Fluid and Filter Changes                    343  Fluid Level Check  soos Re 342  Fluid Type   ics seed ae m n 341  Gear Ranges  4 sepes Ae eed oes DEERE RES 217  Special Additives          0 0    000 2 342   AULOSHCK E eat care ea ee a aeRO ees 227   Auto Up Power Windows               0005  25    A INDEX 383    Battery stoned een ee rem D Nata ease 320   Jump Starting ricas sa reas aia 302  Belts Seat ae rere a aa    Pe 77  Body Mechanism Lubricati0N                  325  B Pillat Locatie 4s ex pd cad 250  Brake Assist System          llle 236  Brake Blind  ii uuu dd bacs OY RE es 361  Brake  Parking  0  2 003 aes oi pete ao   n 232  Brakes 1424 mice ede Mais Bak Haw XOU Pea ares 338  Brake System  is eo nae ras da 234   Anti Lock  ABS     0 2    20 0 0  0000p 234   Master Cylinder          liess 338   Parking   uedes ses m ae ae adie Ca aoe alot 232   Warning Light         0 0 0    eee eee eee 156  Brake Transmission Interlock                  216  Bulb Replacement               00000000 356  Bulbs  LiS taa Seatac ex to e Hat RE 80  Ca
104. W BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM    Children Too Large For Booster Seats    Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt  comfortably  and whose legs are long enough to bend  over the front of the seat when their back is against the  seatback  should use the seat belt in a rear seat  Use this  simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the  vehicle   s seat belt alone     1  Can the child sit all the way back against the back of  the vehicle seat    2  Do the child   s knees bend comfortably over the front  of the vehicle seat     while they are still sitting all the  way back    3  Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder  between their neck and arm     4  Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible  touching  the child   s thighs and not their stomach     5  Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip     If the answer to any of these questions was    no     then the  child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle  If the  child is using the lap shoulder belt  check belt fit peri   odically  A child   s squirming or slouching can move the  belt out of position  If the shoulder belt contacts the face  or neck  move the child closer to the center of the vehicle   Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm  or behind their back     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63    Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints       Restraint Type    Combined  Weight of the    Use any attachment method sh
105. a ede TQ ES 250  Locks  Child Protection    d eise ay wae aes EER 23  DOOR sie  Baie  ida ich gi e en m Beach Rd 20    Lubrication  Body  p eeir ises kameras n OL 325       Maintenance Free Battery        oooo oo o o oo o    320  Maintenance  General                      o 315  Maintenance Procedures          o  llle  315  Maintenance Schedule             o  o ooooo   364  Malfunction Indicator Light  Check Engine          161  Manual  Service        o    es 376  Manual Transmission            o    o o  o   212  Fluid Level Check               o           340  Frequency of Fluid Change                  341  Lubricant Selection            ooooooo o o   340  Master Cylinder  Brakes            oooooooo   338  Mirrors  eos en RR ERG EGUEG Ex eed weed 85  Automatic Dimming            llle 86  Electric Powered         llle 88  Electric Remote           llle 88  He  ted     a edt ex PERS daa 89  REVIEW   ura a Ub S eC S RO KES E 85  Modifications  Alterations  Vehicle                7       390 INDEX IN    Monitor  Tire Pressure System         o o o o o o o   266  Multi Function Control Lever                  107  New Vehicle Break In Peri0d                   75  Occupant  Restraints   sd ea ea hare eigen ks 46  Occupant Restraints  Sedan               o o o   29  Octane Rating  Gasoline  Fuel                   272  Odometer xao danaa ROREM EM a 164  TP ra Morada 164  Oil Change   ndicator          o o o oooo ooo  o oo 169  Oil Change Indicator  Reset                    169  Oil Eng
106. ack into the retractor  If it is locked  the ALR will  make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back  into the retractor  For additional information on ALR   refer to the    Automatic Locking Mode    description un   der    Occupant Restraints     The cinching latch plate is  designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight  when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a  child restraint s belt path  Please see the table below and  the following sections for more information about both  types of seat belts     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71    Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle       What is the weight limit  child s weight    weight of the child restraint  for  using the Tether Anchor with the   seat belt to attach a forward facing  child restraint     Can the rear facing child restraint touch    Weight limit of the  Child Restraint    Always use the tether anchor when  using the seat belt to install a  forward facing child restraint    up to the recommended weight limit  of the child restraint        the back of the front passenger seat     Can the head restraints be removed     Yes    Contact between the front passenger  seat and the child restraint is allowed   if the child restraint manufacturer  also allows contact        Can the buckle stalk be twisted to  tighten the seat belt against the belt  path of the child restraint           Yes  all   Yes    In positions with cinching latch plates   C
107. ad to sudden tire failure  The  grade C corresponds to a level of performance  which all  passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor  Vehicle Safety Standard No  109  Grades B and A repre   sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test  wheel  than the minimum required by law     Excessive speed  under inflation  or excessive load   ing  either separately or in combination  can cause  heat buildup and possible tire failure           INDEX       382 INDEX IN    Adding Engine Coolant  Antifreeze              334  Adding  Fuel sag  oer ettet ot a 276  Adding Washer Fluid              o  o o o o o oo  329  Additives  Fuel              o    cee eee eee 274  AIDDageisc3ua ese e Saad 39  Airbag Deployment              00 00 0000 ee 53  Airbag Eight   4 020 4d Ga tarien Tesiaren e 47  Airbag Maintenance    1       00 000 cece eee 54  Airbag  Side  sese ate a aie die 43  Airbag  Window  Side Curtain                   43  Air Cleaner  Engine  Engine Air Cleaner Filter         319  Air Conditioner Maintenance                   321  Air Conditioning Filter           o oooooooo o    323  Air Conditioning Refrigerant                  321  Air Conditioning SysteM       oooooooooo o    321  Air Pressure  Tires    2 0 0 0    llle 255  Alarm  Security Alarm   s e areae tena tan E E 15  Alarm System  Security Alarm                   15    Alterations Modifications  Vehicle                7    Antifreeze  Engine Coolant              o o o o   333  Capaciti  S   es anre RES 
108. ag system electrical components  While the air  bag system is designed to be maintenance free  if any of  the following occurs  have an authorized studio service  the air bag system immediately     trim cover and cushion  needs to be serviced in any  way  including removal or loosening tightening of  seat attachment bolts   take the vehicle to your  authorized studio  Only manufacturer approved   e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during  seat accessories may be used  If it is necessary to the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is  modify the air bag system for persons with dis  first turned to the ON RUN position    abilities  contact your authorized studio          The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to  eight second interval       The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or  remains on while driving     56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM    NOTE  If the speedometer  tachometer  or any engine  related gauges are not working  the Occupant Restraint  Controller  ORC  may also be disabled  The air bags may  not be ready to inflate for your protection  Promptly  check the Body Control Module  BCM  fuse block inside  the vehicle for blown fuses  Refer to the label located on  the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag  fuses  See your authorized studio if the fuse is good     Event Data Recorder  EDR     This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder   EDR   The main purpose of an EDR is to record
109. age  Chemicals that make roads  passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on  trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly  corrosive to the metal in your vehicle  Outside parking   which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants   road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated  extreme  hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will  have an adverse effect on paint  metal trim  and under   body protection     The following maintenance recommendations will enable  you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion  resistance built into your vehicle     What Causes Corrosion     Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of  paint and protective coatings from your vehicle     The most common causes are     e Road salt  dirt and moisture accumulation     Stone and gravel impact     Insects  tree sap and tar     Salt in the air near seacoast localities     Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants     344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Washing    e    e     e     Wash your vehicle regularly  Always wash your ve   hicle in the shade using MOPARO Car Wash  or a mild  car wash soap  and rinse the panels completely with  clear water     If insects  tar  or other similar deposits have accumu   lated on your vehicle  use MOPARO Super Kleen Bug  and Tar Remover to remove     Use a high quality cleaner wax  such as MOPARO  Cleaner Wax to remove road film  stains and to protect  your paint finish  Take care never to scratch the paint     Avoid usin
110. air  distribution or on the fan speed  the LED switches off to  indicate that the system is no longer controlling all  functions automatically     Deactivating the compressor results in the deactivation of  automatic operation only if the system is no longer able  to guarantee comfort conditions  which depend on the  set temperature      NOTE  Should the system no longer be able to guarantee  the required temperature set in various passenger com   partment zones  the set temperature value will flash for a  few seconds on the display     To restore automatic system control after one or more  manual adjustments  press the AUTO button     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199    SYNC Button    Press the SYNC button  LED on button lit  to align the  passenger side air temperature with that of the driver  side     This function makes temperature regulation easier when  the driver is travelling alone     Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to set the  passenger side temperature and return to separate air  temperature management     Air Recirculation    The Air Recirculation is managed according to the fol   lowing operating logics     e forced activation  air recirculation always on   indi   cated by the LED on the Recirculation Control button     e forced deactivation  air recirculation always off  air  intake from the outside   signalled by the LED on the  Recirculation Control button switching off     Forced activation deactivation can be selected by press   ing the 
111. al accessories  Failure to follow this procedure could result in per   sonal injury or property damage due to battery explo     3  Remove the protective cover over the remote posi         sion     tive     battery post  To remove the cover  pull upward  on the cover     CAUTION     4  If using another vehicle to jump start the battery  park  the vehicle within the jumper cables reach  set the   Failure to follow these procedures could result in  parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF  damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle    or the discharged vehicle   WARNING   1  Connect the positive  4  end of the jumper cable to the    Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this positive     post of the discharged vehicle        could establish a ground connection and personal  injury could result     2  Connect the opposite end of the positive     jumper  cable to the positive  4  post of the booster battery        a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305    3  Connect the negative end     of the jumper cable to the 5   negative     post of the booster battery     NOTE  Before connecting to the discharged battery you  must first disconnect the negative     cable from the  discharged battery as this is the only way to successfully  jump start the vehicle     4  Connect the opposite end of the negative     jumper  cable to the disconnected negative     cable on the  discharged battery     WARNING  8     Do not connect the cable to the negative post     of the    discha
112. al cable     Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low  Standing Wave Ratio  SWR      Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal  may require special precautions        All installations should be checked for possible interference be   tween the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic  systems         Chrysler Group LLC    14BF 126 AA    AE    First Edition    Printed in U S A     
113. always flows from the side dashboard diffus   ers  it is  however  possible to interrupt the air flow by  operating the wheel located near the corresponding  vents     In AUTO mode  the climate control system automatically  manages air distribution  the LEDs on the Mode Control  buttons are off       When set manually  the air distribution is indicated by  the LEDs on the selected buttons switching on     In combined function mode  functions are enabled to   gether with those already set when the relevant button is  pressed  If a button whose function is already active is  pressed  the operation is cancelled and the corresponding  LED switches off     To restore automatic control of the air distribution after a  manual selection  press the AUTO button     198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    AUTO Button    When the AUTO button is pressed  LED on button lit  the  climate control system automatically adjusts the follow   ing settings in the corresponding zones     e quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the  passenger compartment    e climate control system compressor  e air recirculation  cancelling all previous manual adjustments     This is indicated by the LED on the AUTO button  switching on     If the AUTO button is pressed when the AUTO LED is  on  the system switches to completely manual mode  it  displays the current flow and distribution status  which  will no longer be managed automatically     If a manual intervention is made on at least the 
114. and the clutch release system  The two  systems are separated in the reservoir  and a leak in one  system will not affect the other system  The manual  transmission clutch release system should not require  fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle  If the  brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does  not indicate any leaks or other problems  it may be a  result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system   See your local authorized studio for service     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339    WARNING   Continued     Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid   Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine Parts    in       Maintaining Your Vehicle    for further information     WARNING     e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake  fluid  Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine  Parts    in    Maintaining Your Vehicle    for further  information  Using the wrong type of brake fluid    can severely damage your brake system and or  impair its performance  The proper type of brake  fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the  original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder  reservoir      Continued        e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or   moisture  use only new brake fluid or fluid that has  been in a tightly closed container  Keep the master  cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times  Brake  fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the  air resulting in a lower boiling point  This may  cause it to boil unexpectedly 
115. and turn on the vehicle   s  Hazard Warning flashers   2  Uncoil the Sealant Hose  6  and then remove the cap    2  Verify that the valve stem  on the wheel with the from the Ring atthe end of thethose     deflated tire  is in a position that is near to the ground   This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses  6  and  7  to reach 3  Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the  the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the deflated tire    ground  This will provide the best positioning of the    a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289    4  Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw  the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose  6  onto the  valve stem     5  Uncoil the Power Plug  8  and insert the plug into the  vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet     NOTE  Do not remove foreign objects  e g   screws or  nails  from the tire      C  Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire     e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE   FIT kit     NOTE  Manual transmission vehicles must have the  parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL     e After pressing the Power Button  4   the sealant  white  fluid  will flow from the Sealant Bottle  1  through the  Sealant Hose  6  and into the tire     NOTE  Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the  tire     If the sealant  white fluid  does not flow within 0   10  seconds through the Sealant Hose  6      1  Press the Power Button  4  to turn Off the TIREFIT kit   Disconnect the Sealant Hose  6  from the valve ste
116. ants And Child Restraints    Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward   facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until  they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear  facing child safety seat  Two types of child restraints can  be used rearward facing  infant carriers and convertible  child seats     The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the  vehicle  It is recommended for children from birth until  they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier   Convertible child seats can be used either rearward   facing or forward facing in the vehicle  Convertible child  seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward   facing direction than infant carriers do  so they can be  used rearward facing by children who have outgrown    their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years  old  Children should remain rearward facing until they  reach the highest weight or height allowed by their  convertible child seat     WARNING     e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an  air bag  A deploying passenger Advanced Front  Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child    12 years or younger  including a child in a rearward  facing infant seat      Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear  seat        a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61  Older Children And Child Restraints the seatback  they should use a belt positioning booster    seat  The child and belt positioning bo
117. ar lighter is switched off   brake lever  To activate the cigar lighter  press button A           After a few seconds the button automatically returns to   Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W  its initial position  and the cigar lighter is ready for use  to the socket  Do not damage the socket by using      unsuitable adaptors        Cigar Lighter   If Equipped       UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143    CUPHOLDERS For the rear seat passengers their is one cupholder    For the driver and front passenger  cupholders are lo  ea arnes    cated on the floor console between the front seats        Rear Cupholder  Front Cupholders    144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  STORAGE    Glovebox Storage   Your vehicle is equipped with a upper and lower glove   box which is located on the right side of the instrument  panel  Pull outward on the door latch to open either  glovebox and push the upper door down to close it and  the lower door upward to close it           A   Upper And Lower Glovebox Storage Compartment          Glovebox Storage       UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145  Front Center Armrest Storage     If Equipped The front center armrest can also be lifted up and  The front center armrest contains a storage compartment  e ihe    To open the storage compartment push in the upper lower release latch   release latch on the front of the armrest        Front Center Armrest Raised Position    Armrest Upper Release Latch    Lift upw
118. ard on the armrest to gain access to the storage area     146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE    CARGO AREA FEATURES To raise the cargo floor lift it up by the handle and place  itin the rear housing which is located behind the rear seat  back        The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow  increased cargo capacity     Push down the release button  located at the outboard  top of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded   down position to provide a flat load floor cargo area   When returning the seatback to its upright position  push  rearward until the seatback is properly latched        REAR CARGO STORAGE FEATURES    The rear cargo area has a upper shelf which allows for  additional storage below the cargo floor         O   0     Rear Housing For Cargo Floor       UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147    The rear cargo area is equipped with two storage bins REAR WINDOW FEATURES  located on the both sides of the cargo area along with two  cargo hooks     Rear Window Defroster    The rear window defroster button is located with   the climate controls on the instrument panel  Press  this button to turn on the rear window defroster  An  indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear  window defroster is on  The rear window defroster  automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes   To manually shut the defroster off  push the button a  second time        NOTE  To prevent excessive battery drain  use the rear  window defros
119. at specified for your vehicle  Some combinations  of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus   pension dimensions and performance characteris   tics  resulting in changes to steering  handling  and    braking of your vehicle  This can cause unpredict   able handling and stress to steering and suspen   sion components  You could lose control and have  a collision resulting in serious injury or death  Use  only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings  approved for your vehicle      Continued        e Never use a tire with a smaller load index or  capacity  other than what was originally equipped  on your vehicle  Using a tire with a smaller load  index could result in tire overloading and failure   You could lose control and have a collision    e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having  adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire  failure and loss of vehicle control     CAUTION     Replacing original tires with tires of a different size  may result in false speedometer and odometer read   ings        264 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    TIRE CHAINS CAUTION   Continued     Use only compact chains  or other traction aids that meet     Because of restricted chain clearance between tires  SAE type    Class S    specifications  Chains must be the and other suspension components  it is important    proper size for the vehicle  as recommended by the chain that only chains in good condition are used  Broken  manufacturer  chains can cause serious damage  Stop the vehi
120. b   lems  You could lose control of your vehicle     Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and  satisfactory operation of your vehicle  Three primary  areas are affected by improper tire pressure         Continued     A STARTING AND OPERATING 255    WARNING   Continued       Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle  to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the    right or left     Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom   mended cold tire inflation pressure     Economy    Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat   terns to develop across the tire tread  These abnormal wear  patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier  tire replacement  Under inflation also increases tire rolling  resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption     Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability    Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride   Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride        Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability  of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish  response or over responsiveness in the steering     Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic  and unpredictable steering response     Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the  vehicle to drift left or right     Tire Inflation Pressures    The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the  driver s side B Pillar     The pressure should be checked and adjusted as we
121. be dangerous if done improperly  so please follow the procedures in this section carefully     NOTE  When using a portable battery booster pack   follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and  precautions     WARNING     Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen   It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury     CAUTION     Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any  other booster source with a system voltage greater  than 12 Volts or damage to the battery  starter motor   alternator or electrical system may occur        WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303       Preparations For Jump Start WARNING     The battery in your vehicle is located on the drivers side    of the engine compartment  e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever    the hood is raised  It can start anytime the ignition  switch is ON  You can be injured by moving fan  blades    e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings  watch    bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent  electrical contact  You could be seriously injured      Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your  skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is  flammable and explosive  Keep open flames or  sparks away from the battery        Positive Terminal    304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN    1  Set the parking brake  shift the automatic transmission Jump Starting Procedure  into PARK and turn the ignition to OFF     1  2  Turn off the heater  radio  and all unnecessary electri  WARNING     c
122. c Warning Light    The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if   any of the following conditions occur  Oil   Change Request  Engine Oil Pressure Sensor   Failure  External Light Failure  Fuel Cut Off  Intervention  Fuel Cut Off Not Available  Parking Sensor  Failure DST system failure     16  Tachometer    The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine  revolutions per minute  RPM x 1000  for each gear range   Before reaching the red area  ease up on the accelerator to  prevent engine damage     17  Seat Belt Reminder Light    When the ignition switch is first turned to ON   RUN  this light will turn on if the driver   s seat belt  is unbuckled  a chime will sound  When driving   if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled  the Seat Belt       160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound   Refer to    Occupant Restraints    in    Things To Know  Before Starting Your Vehicle    for further information     18  Air Bag Warning Light    e  This light will turn on for four seconds as a  ry bulb check when the ignition switch is first   turned to ON RUN  If the light is either not   on during starting  stays on  or turns on while  driving  have the system inspected at an authorized  studio as soon as possible  Refer to    Occupant Re   straints    in    Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve   hicle    for further information     19  Passenger Air Bag Disable  PAD  Light    The Passenger Air Bag Disable  PAD  Indi
123. cator Light tells  the driver and front passenger when the front passenger  air bag is turned off  The PAD Indicator light illuminates    the words  PASS AIR BAG OFF  to show that the front  passenger air bag will not inflate during a collision  requiring air bags  When the right front passenger seat is  empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat   the passenger air bag will not inflate even though the  PAD indicator light is not illuminated    20  Oil Pressure Warning Light    AS this light indicates low engine oil pressure  The  light should turn on momentarily when the engine is  started  If the light turns on while driving  stop the vehicle  and shut off the engine as soon as possible  A chime will  sound for four minutes when this light turns on     Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected   This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine   The engine oil level must be checked under the hood     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161    21  Vehicle Security Light    If during starting  the key code is not correctly   recognized  the Vehicle Security Light comes   on in the instrument panel  In this case  turn   the key to OFF and then to ON RUN  if it is  still locked  try again with the other keys that come with  the vehicle  Contact an authorized studio if you still  cannot start the engine     If with the engine running the warning light flashes  this  means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor  device  Contac
124. ced  and rein   stalled at the first opportunity     WARNING       Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use  only  With these tires  do not drive more than 50 mph     80 km h     e Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life   When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators   the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced         Continued        260 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    WARNING   Continued  Tire Spinning      Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your    When stuck in mud  sand  snow  or ice conditions  do not  spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph  48 km h  or  for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop   ping when you are stuck    Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Refer to    Fre eing A Stuck Vehicle    in    What To Do In  conventional tire on the compact spare wheel  since the p ergencies    for further information    wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare     Do not install more than one compact spare tire  wheel WARNING     on the vehicle at any given time     CAUTION     Because of the reduced ground clearance  do not take    spare  Failure to do so could result in spare tire  failure and loss of vehicle control        Fast spinning tires can be dangerous  Forces gener   ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam   age or failure  A tire could explode and injure some     one  Do not spin your vehicle   s wheels faster than  30 mph  48 km h  for more than 30 seconds continu   ously wh
125. cle  NOTE  Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire  immediately if noise occurs that could indicate    chain breakage  Remove the damaged parts of the  chain before further use      Do not exceed 45 mph  70 km h     e Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large  bumps  especially with a loaded vehicle    e Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as  possible and then retighten after driving about  0 5 mile  0 8 km      Continued    e Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry   pavement     CAUTION     To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires  observe the    following precautions     Use Security Chain Company  SCC  SCC Z6 low  profile or equivalent chains on 185 55R15 tires only         Continued     A STARTING AND OPERATING 265    CAUTION   Continued     e Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions  on the method of installation  operating speed  and    conditions for use  Always use the lower suggested  operating speed of the chain manufacturer  if dif   ferent from the speed recommended by the vehicle  manufacturer     Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the  chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest  different maximum speeds  This notice applies to all  chain traction devices  including link and cable  radial   chains        TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS    The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at  different loads and perform different steering  driving   and braking functions  For these reasons 
126. crews  using a T20 driver  and  separate the backplate from the lamp housing     4  Remove the tail  stop  or turn signal bulbs by pushing  them slightly and turning counter clockwise     5  Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out   6  Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp   Center High Mounted Stop Lamp  CHMSL     This light is an LED assembly  See your authorized studio  for replacement     Aa MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359  FLUID CAPACITIES                      U S  Metric  Fuel  Approximate  13 1 Gallons 50 Liters  Engine Oil with Filter  1 4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3 8 Liters  Cooling System  1 4 Liter Turbo Engine  MOPAR   Antifreeze  6 1 Quarts 5 8 Liters    Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula       with Manual Transmission   1 4 Liter Turbo Engine  MOPARO Antifreeze  6 1 Quarts 5 8 Liters  Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula       ith Automatic Transmission                         360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    FLUIDS  LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS  Engine       Component Fluid  Lubricant  or Genuine Part    Engine Coolant   1 4L Turbo Engine   We recommend you use MOPAR   Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year  150 000 Mile  Formula OAT  Organic Additive Technology  or equivalent meeting the  requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106    Engine Oil   1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use API Certified 5W 40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil   meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10896   Refer to your engine oil filler cap
127. ctory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of  the vehicle  Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri   cant has become contaminated with water     NOTE  If contaminated with water  the fluid should be  changed immediately     Automatic Transmission     If Equipped  Selection Of Lubricant    It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to  ensure optimum transmission performance and life   Use only the manufacturer   s recommended transmission  fluid  Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine Parts    in       Maintaining Your Vehicle    for fluid specifications  It is  important to maintain the transmission fluid at the  correct level using the recommended fluid  No chemical  flushes should be used in any transmission  only the  approved lubricant should be used     CAUTION     Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac   turer   s recommended fluid may cause deterioration    in transmission shift quality and or torque converter  shudder  Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine  Parts    in    Maintaining Your Vehicle    for fluid speci   fications        342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Special Additives    The manufacturer strongly recommends against using  any special additives in the transmission     Automatic Transmission Fluid  ATF  is an engineered  product and its performance may be impaired by supple   mental additives  Therefore  do not add any fluid addi   tives to the transmission  The only exception to this  policy is the use
128. d Brown Powertrain  F08 40 Amp Blower Motor F17 10 Amp   Powertrain  Orange Red  F09 7 5 Amp   Transmission F18 5 Amp Powertrain  Multi   Brown Tan air     If Equipped   F10 15 Amp   Horn F19 7 5 Amp   Air Conditioning  Blue Brown  F11 10 Amp   Powertrain F20 30 Amp   Rear Defroster  Red Green  F14 20 Amp   Power Outlet 115V F21 15 Amp   Fuel Pump  Yellow Blue                                     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351                                           Orange                Cavity mk Mini Fuse Description Cavity in Mini Fuse Description   F23 20 Amp   Anti Lock Brake F84 7 5 Amp   Transmission  Yellow Valves Brown   F24 7 5 Amp   Stability Control F85 15 Amp   Front Power  Brown System Blue Outlet 12V   F30 5 Amp After Run Pump F86 15 Amp   Rear Power Outlet   Tan Blue 12V  F81 70 Amp PTC  Secondary  F88 7 5 Amp   Heated Mirrors  Tan Tan  F82 40 Amp Transmission  Orange  F83 40 Amp PTC  Primary           352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN          Interior Fuses Vehicle        The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module   Cavity Fuse iin Description   BCM  and is located on the driver s side under the Number   instrument panel  1 F12 7 5 Amp   Right Low Beam       Brown  2 F32 7 5 Amp   Front and Rear    Brown   Ceiling Lights  Trunk and Door                Courtesy Lights     3 F53 7 5 Amp   Instrument Panel  Brown   Node  4 F38 20 Amp   Central Door  Yellow   Locking  5 F36 15 Amp   Diagnostic Socket   Blue Car Radio  Climate  Fuse Panel Control S
129. d the head restraint should be in the raised  position which can be done by pulling upward on the  head restraint     To raise the head restraints  pull upward on the head  restraint  To lower the head restraints  press the push  button  located at the base of the head restraint  and push  downward on the head restraint     a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103    WARNING     The head restraints for all occupants must be prop   erly adjusted before operating the vehicle or occupy   ing a seat  Head restraints should never be adjusted    while the vehicle is in motion  Driving a vehicle with  the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed  could cause serious injury or death in the event of an  accident        Push Buttons    104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE  OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD 2  Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the red    To open the hood  two latches must be released to open Sam iy catch dever to the left and raise the hood  The  the hood  safety catch lever is located under the center front  edge of the hood   1  Pull the hood release lever located under the left side  of the instrument panel         q                             Safety Catch Lever       Hood Release Lever    a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105    CAUTION     To prevent possible damage  do not slam the hood to  close it  Lower the hood until it is open approxi     mately 6 in  15 cm   and then drop it  This should  secure both latches  Never
130. d to secure child  restraints  An unused belt could injure a child if they play  with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor  Before  installing a child restraint using the LATCH system   buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of  the child s reach  If the buckled seat belt interferes with  the child restraint installation  instead of buckling it  behind the child restraint  route the seat belt through the  child restraint belt path and then buckle it  Do not lock  the seatbelt  Remind all children in the vehicle that the  seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with  them        70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    WARNING     Improper installation of a child restraint to the  LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re     straint  The child could be badly injured or killed   Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions  exactly when installing an infant or child restraint        Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat  Belt    The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are  equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking  Retractor  ALR  or a cinching latch plate or both  Both  types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of    the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is  not necessary to use a locking clip  The ALR retractor can  be    switched    into a locked mode by pulling all of the  webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing  retract b
131. depending on the  location  type and orientation of the obstacle     If several obstacles are detected  the Rear Park Assist  system indicates the nearest obstacle     The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds  to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the  underside of the car during the parking maneuver     Rear Park Assist Alerts    If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear  is engaged  an audible alert is activated     The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver  that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle  The pauses  between the tones are directly proportional to the dis   tance from the obstacle  Pulses emitted in quick succes   sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle  A  continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than  12 in  30 cm  away        122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME  Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System          SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION  Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present   Audible signal  dashboard loudspeaker   within the sensors    e Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the  field of view distance decreases     e Emits continuous tone at 12 in  30 cm   e Adjustable volume level   Refer to  Menu Functions     for further information         Failure Sensor or System Visual Signal  instrument panel   failures e Icon appears on display     Message is displayed on multifunction display   where provided                  While
132. down a hill  These are unsafe    practices that limit your response to changing traffic  or road conditions  You might lose control of the  vehicle and have a collision        CAUTION     Towing the vehicle  coasting  or driving for any other  reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause    severe transmission damage  Refer to    Recreational  Towing    in    Starting And Operating    and    Towing A  Disabled Vehicle    in    What To Do In Emergencies     for further information        DRIVE    This range should be used for most city and highway  driving  It provides the smoothest upshifts and down   shifts  and the best fuel economy  The transmission  automatically upshifts through all forward gears  The  DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris   tics under all normal operating conditions     A STARTING AND OPERATING 221    To maximize fuel economy  the Dual Dry Clutch auto   matic transmission uses a geartrain arrangement similar  to a manual transmission  Therefore  you should become  familiar with some of the normal operational character   istics of the DDCT      e    During low speed driving conditions in first gear   vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in  response to changes in accelerator pedal position  This  behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped  with a manual transmission     At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar  to a manual transmission as the transmission changes  gears  These noises are normal and will
133. during hard or pro   longed braking  resulting in sudden brake failure   This could result in a collision   Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in  spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts  causing  the brake fluid to catch fire  Brake fluid can also  damage painted and vinyl surfaces  care should be  taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces         Continued     340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    WARNING   Continued       Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate  the brake fluid  Brake seal components could be  damaged  causing partial or complete brake failure   This could result in a collision     CAUTION     Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall  clutch system performance  Improper brake fluids  may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of  clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis   sion        Manual Transmission     If Equipped  Lubricant Selection    Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission  fluid  Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine Parts    in     Maintaining Your Vehicle    for further information     Fluid Level Check    Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug  The fluid  level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a  point not more than 3 16 in  4 7 mm  below the bottom  of the hole     Add fluid  if necessary  to maintain the proper level     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341    Frequency Of Fluid Change    Under normal operating conditions  the fluid installed at  the fa
134. e     e directs air flow to windshield and front side window  diffusers     e activates the heated rear window     202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN    e activates the heated windshield  for versions  markets   where provided      e displays the fan speed  Blower Control Indicator LED  lit      NOTE  The Front Defrost Control  MAX DEF  function  remains on for about three minutes from when the engine  coolant reaches the appropriate temperature     When the function is activated  the LED on the AUTO  button switches off  With the function activated the only  possible manual adjustments are adjusting the fan speed  and turning the heated rear window off     When the Recirculation Control  Rear Defrost Control   or  AUTO buttons are pressed  the climate control system  will deactivate the Front Defrost  MAX DEF  function     Selecting the footwell windshield or only windshield dis   tribution activates the climate control system compressor     LED on A C button on  and the air recirculation is set to   outside air    intake  LED on the recirculation button off       This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows   It is  however  always possible to manage air recirculation  and the climate control system compressor manually     Rear Window Defrosting    Press the Rear Defrost button to activate heated rear  window defrosting     The effective activation of the function is indicated by the  rear defrost warning light on the instrument panel  switching ON     Th
135. e Light  i Fach tire  including the spare  if provided     1  should be checked monthly when cold and  inflated to the inflation pressure recommended  by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle  placard or tire inflation pressure label   If your vehicle  has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the  vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label  you should  determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those   tires      As an added safety feature  your vehicle has been  equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System   TPMS  that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when  one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated   Accordingly  when the low tire pressure telltale illumi   nates  you should stop and check your tires as soon as  possible  and inflate them to the proper pressure  Driving  on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to  overheat and can lead to tire failure  Under inflation also  reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life  and may affect  the vehicles handling and stopping ability     Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper  tire maintenance  and it is the driver   s responsibility to  maintain correct tire pressure  even if under inflation has  not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS  low tire pressure telltale     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163    Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS  malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not  operating
136. e To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards     e To increase or decrease values during settings        168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    NOTE  When opening one of the front doors  the EVIC  display will turn on the clock  the external temperature  and the miles or kilometers covered  for versions   markets  where provided  for a few seconds     Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC   Setup Menu    The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a  cycle  The menu includes the following functions     e Speed Beep  e Trip B Data  e Dimmer    Autoclose    e    e Units  e Language    Buzzer Volume    e    e Daylights  D R L    e Hill Start  e Low Tire Pressure    e Exit Menu  e Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without  Submenu    Briefly press the MENU button to select the main menu  option to set     Press the UP A or DOWN V button  by single presses   to select the new setting     Briefly press the MENU button to store the new setting and  go back to the main menu option previously selected     e Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With  Submenu    Briefly press the MENU button to display the first  submenu option        Press the UP A or DOWN V button  by single presses   to scroll through all the submenu options     Briefly press the MENU button to select the displayed  submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu     Press the UP AA or DOWN V button  by single presses   to select the new setting for this submenu option     Briefly pre
137. e in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a  number of reasons  A child or others could be    brake pedal  Otherwise  damage to the shift lever    could result     DO NOT race the engine when shifting from    PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range  as this  can damage the drivetrain     seriously or fatally injured  Children should be  warned not to touch the parking brake  brake pedal  or the shift lever        The following indicators should be used to ensure that    Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle      LI   you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position     or in a location accessible to children  A child could  operate power windows  other controls  or move     When shifting into PARK  firmly move the shift lever  the vehicle  all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated        Look at the shift lever position display and verify that  it indicates the PARK position       With brake pedal released  verify that the shift lever  will not move out of PARK     220 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    REVERSE    This range is for moving the vehicle backward  Shift into  REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete  stop     NEUTRAL    Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged  periods with the engine running  The engine may be  started in this range  Apply the parking brake and shift  the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle     WARNING     Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the  ignition to coast 
138. e instrument panel  cluster  will both be blinking  until the ignition is turned  off  In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road  you must follow the system reset procedure     52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In                                     Customer Action Customer Will See   1  Turn ignition OFF   Turn Signal Switch Must be   placed in Neutral State     2  Turn ignition ON  Left Turn Light is OFF  Right Turn Light BLINKS    3  Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON  Right Turn Light is ON SOLID  Left Turn Light  BLINKS    4  Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON  Left Turn Light is ON SOLID  Right Turn Light  BLINKS    5  Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON  Right Turn Light is ON SOLID  Left Turn Light  BLINKS    6  Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON  Left Turn Light is ON SOLID  Right Turn Light is ON  SOLID    7  Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF   Turn Signal Left Turn Light is OFF  Right Turn Light is OFF    Switch Must be placed in Neutral State     8  Turn ignition OFF  System is now reset and the engine may be started    9  Turn Hazard Flashers OFF  Manually                  a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53    If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 sec   onds  then the turn signal lights will turn off and the  reset procedure must be performed again in order to be  successful     If A Deployment Occurs    The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate  immediately after deployment     NOTE  In a rollover the pretensio
139. e of debris before connecting the  TIREFIT kit       You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle    tires  The kit also comes with two needles  located in  the Accessory Storage Compartment  on the bottom of  the air pump  for inflating sport balls  rafts  or similar  inflatable items  However  use only the Air Pump Hose   7  and make sure the Mode Select Knob  5  is in the  Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting  sealant into them  The TIREFIT Sealant is only in   tended to seal punctures less than Y in  6 mm   diameter in the tread of your vehicle       Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses     a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287    WARNING       Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the  vehicle closest to traffic  Pull far enough off the  road to avoid the danger of being hit when using  the TIREFIT kit      Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the  following circumstances      If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately    1 4 in   6 mm  or larger      If the tire has any sidewall damage     If the tire has any damage from driving with  extremely low tire pressure      If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat  tire      If the wheel has any damage      If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or  the wheel      Continued     WARNING   Continued       Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat  source    e A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision  or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
140. e started     NOTE  The heater only operates if the outside tempera   ture and engine coolant temperature are low  The heater  will not activate if the battery voltage is too low        STARTING AND OPERATING                                                                                           CONTENTS  B STARTING PROCEDURES   60 xoccviraa a 209 M MANUAL TRANSMISSION   IF EQUIPPED       212  Manual Transmission     If Equipped          209 DOWNSEHIETING     4 35 ace date a ES woe mes 213  Automatic Transmission     If Equipped        209 Bl AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION      Normal Starting     6 6 0 0    ess 209 PEE a a AE  Cold Weather Operation                  210 BS Fa ae Rene QUERI ere es  Extended Park Starting       210 Brake   Transmission Shift Interlock System      216  If Engine Fails To Start        isses 211 Six Speed Automatic Transmission           216  After Starting   cies page eer Tap Home pep q east eee  D Turbo Charger    Cool Down        isses 211 B AUTOSTICKO     IF EQUIPPED   240504 sa04 227  Operativo  iaa ee as a ae a 227                206 STARTING AND OPERATING HN                                                                                                                            ll DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES           229 Traction Control System  TCS               237  Acceleration  saos ew need ee CAREY PES 229 Hill Start Assist  HSA                 5  238  TACO  as aria adr a canada 229 DYNAMIC STEERING TORQUE            239   ll DRIVING THR
141. e system maintains comfort inside the passenger com   partment and compensates for possible variations in  external climate conditions     The climate control system can recognize extremely cold   or extremely hot  conditions in the passenger compart   ment and consequently provide optimal management of  the system   s capabilities     NOTE  The reference temperature is 71 6  F  22   C  for  optimal comfort management     The automatically controlled parameters and functions are   e air temperature at the driver  front passenger side vents   e fan speed  continuous variation of the air flow        compressor engagement  for cooling dehumidifying  the air      e air recirculation     All these functions can be adjusted manually by operat   ing the system  selecting one or more functions and  modifying their parameters     Automatic control of the functions will be suspended  the  system will only override the settings for safety reasons     Manual selections always take priority over automatic  ones and are stored until the AUTO button is pressed or  the system itself intervenes for specific safety reasons     194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    The amount of air introduced into the passenger com   partment is not affected by car speed  it is regulated by  the fan  which is controlled electronically     The air temperature is always automatically controlled  according to the temperature set on the display  except  for when the system is off or in certain conditions w
142. e the passenger compartment  Rotating the dial to  the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler  temperatures  while rotating to the right into the red area  indicates warmer temperatures     2  Recirculation Control    Push this control button to change the system between  recirculation mode and outside air mode  Recirculation  can be used when outside conditions such as smoke   odors  dust  or high humidity are present     NOTE       Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make  the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur   Extended use of this mode is not recommended       The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp  weather could cause windows to fog on the inside   because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle  Select  the outside air position for maximum defogging     e Recirculation can be used in all modes except for  Defrost     e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb   ing the mode control selection        186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    3  Blower Control   Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced  through the ventilation system in any mode  The blower  speed increases as you move the control to the right from  the    0     OFF  position  There are four blower speeds    4  AIC Button   Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning  A light  will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is  engaged    MAX A C    For maximum cooling  use the A C and recirculation  modes at the same time  
143. e used as a tire pressure gauge  while adjusting your tire pressure     Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes  the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure   Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire  tread life  and may affect the vehicle s handling and  stopping ability        STARTING AND OPERATING 269    e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte  Base System  nance  and it is the driver   s responsibility to maintain  correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge  even  if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger  illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim  Light  mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels    Sensors  mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem    transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module     IN This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the  instrument cluster     e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure   and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in  the tire  NOTE  It is particularly important for you to check the   tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly 5  and to maintain the proper pressure     The TPMS consists of the following components     Receiver Module    Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors      Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light    270 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings    The Tire Pressure Moni
144. ecide to  look under the hood yourself  see    Maintaining Your  Vehicle     Follow the warnings under the    Cooling  System Pressure Cap    paragraph        12  Engine Temperature Warning Light    This light warns of an overheated engine condition  The  engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and  a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold   If the light turns on while driving  safely pull over and  stop the vehicle  If the A C system is on  turn it off   Also  shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the  vehicle  If the temperature reading does not return to       normal  turn the engine off immediately and call for  service  Refer to    If Your Engine Overheats    in    What To  Do In Emergencies    for further information     13  High Beam Indicator    E  This light indicates that the headlights are on high  beam  Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer   ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam     14  Park Headlight ON Indicator   Follow Me Home   Headlight Delay  Indicator     If Equipped    This indicator will illuminate when the park  lights or headlights are turned on  If the Follow  Me Home feature is activated this indicator  will illuminate and the Electronic Vehicle Infor   mation Center  EVIC  will show how long the function  remains active  For further information  refer to    Follow  Me Home    in    Understanding The Features of Your  Vehicle                D 07    UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159  15  Generi
145. ed on the outer side of the seat              A     Power Lumbar Switch  B     Heated Seat Switch       96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE    NOTE  Once a heat setting is selected  heat will be felt REAR SEATS  within two to five minutes     Rear Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment    WARNING  The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats  near    the floor   e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin    because of advanced age  chronic illness  diabetes   spinal cord injury  medication  alcohol use  exhaus   tion or other physical condition must exercise care  when using the seat heater  It may cause burns  even at low temperatures  especially if used for    long periods of time      Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that  insulates against heat  such as a blanket or cushion   This may cause the seat heater to overheat  Sitting  in a seat that has been overheated could cause  serious burns due to the increased surface tempera   ture of the seat  Adjusting Bar       a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97    While sitting in the seat  lift up on the bar and move the  seat forward or rearward  Release the bar once the  desired position is reached  Then  using body pressure   move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that  the seat adjusters have latched     WARNING     e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous   Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of  control which could cause a collision and serious  inj
146. eed     NOTE  There are steps that you can take to slow down  an impending overheat condition     e If your air conditioner  A C  is on  turn it off  The A C  system adds heat to the engine cooling system and  turning the A C off can help remove this heat     e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum  heat  the mode control to floor and the blower control  to high  This allows the heater core to act as a  supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat  from the engine cooling system        284 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN    CAUTION     Driving with a hot cooling system could damage  your vehicle  If the pointer rises to the H  red  mark   the instrument cluster will sound a chime  When  safe  pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at  idle  Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the  pointer drops back into the normal range  If the  pointer remains on the H  red  mark for more than a  minute  turn the engine off immediately and call for  service     WARNING     You or others can be badly burned by hot engine  coolant  antifreeze  or steam from your radiator  If  you see or hear steam coming from under the hood      Continued        WARNING   Continued     do not open the hood until the radiator has had time    to cool  Never try to open a cooling system pressure  cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot        TIREFIT KIT    Small punctures up to 4     6 mm  in the tire tread can be  sealed with TIREFIT  Foreign objects  e g   screws or
147. eleration    Rapid acceleration on snow covered  wet  or other slip   pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull  erratically to the right or left  This phenomenon occurs  when there is a difference in the surface traction under  the front  driving  wheels     WARNING     Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous   Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the    front wheels  You could lose control of the vehicle  and possibly have a collision  Accelerate slowly and  carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction   ice  snow  wet  mud  loose sand  etc          Traction    When driving on wet or slushy roads  it is possible for a  wedge of water to build up between the tire and road  surface  This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or  complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability  To  reduce this possibility  the following precautions should  be observed     1  Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are  slushy     2  Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles     3  Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first  become visible     4  Keep tires properly inflated     5  Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and  the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a  sudden stop        230 STARTING AND OPERATING In  DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water    Driving through water more than a few inches centi  Although your vehicle is capable of driving through  meters deep will require extra cautio
148. en        8  Rotate the glove compartment door back into position     Refer to the    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper  maintenance intervals     Body Lubrication    Locks and all body pivot points  including such items  as seat tracks  door hinge pivot points and rollers   liftgate  tailgate  sliding doors and hood hinges  should    be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease   such as MOPARO Spray White Lube to assure quiet  easy  operation and to protect against rust and wear  Prior to  the application of any lubricant  the parts concerned  should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit  after  lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed   Particular attention should also be given to hood latching  components to ensure proper function  When performing  other underhood services  the hood latch  release mecha   nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated     The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a  year  preferably in the Fall and Spring  Apply a small  amount of a high quality lubricant  such as MOPARO  Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder        326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Wiper Blades    Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the  windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge  or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner  This will  remove accumulations of salt  waxes  or road film  and  help reduce streaking and smearing     Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods 
149. en you are stuck  and do not let anyone near  a spinning wheel  no matter what the speed     your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the  compact spare installed  Damage to the vehicle may  result           STARTING AND OPERATING 261  Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread    Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves ney wl appends Pande wien He ead cepi   to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in  2 mm   When the tread is worn to the   land tread wear indicators  the tire should be replaced  Refer to  P replacement tires in this section for further information     Life Of Tire    The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying  factors including  but not limited to     e Driving style 5    e Tire pressure       e Distance driven    e Performance tires  tires with a speed rating of V or  055007576 higher  and summer tires typically have a reduced  tread life  Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main     a pe tenance schedule is highly recommended     2     New Tire       262 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    WARNING     Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six  years  regardless of the remaining tread  Failure to    follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure   You could lose control and have a collision resulting  in serious injury or death        Keep dismounted tires in a cool  dry place with as little  exposure to light as possible  Protect tires f
150. ent the windows from  misting up  In this case  if the system is capable of  maintaining the required temperature  the AUTO LED  does not switch off     The temperatures will flash seven times and the AUTO  LED will switch off if the required temperature cannot be  maintained     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201    To restore automatic control of compressor engagement   press the A C Control button again or press the AUTO  button     With compressor off     e if the outside temperature is higher than the set one   the climate control system will not be able to satisfy the  request     e The fan speed can be reset manually     With the compressor on and the engine running  manual  ventilation cannot be lower than the minimum speed   only one LED lit      NOTE  With the compressor off  air cannot be introduced  to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower  than the outside temperature  Moreover  under certain  environmental conditions  windows could mist rapidly  since the air is not dehumidified     Rapid Window Demisting  MAX DEF function     Press the MAX DEF button to activate  LED on button  on  the windshield and side window demisting function     The climate control system carries out the following  operations       switches on the air conditioning compressor when  environmental conditions are suitable     e switches air recirculation off   e sets maximum air temperature  HI  in both zones     e sets fan speed according to the engine coolant  temperatur
151. ental Driver Side Knee Air Bag     Knee Impact Bolster     Driver Advanced Front Air Bag     Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag   e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags  SAB    e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains  SABIC   e Front and Side Impact Sensors    Front Seat Belt Pretensioners  Seat Belt Buckle Switch   and Seat Track Position Sensors       NOTE       Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim   but they will open during air bag deployment     e After any collision  the vehicle should be taken to an  authorized studio immediately     42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE    Advanced Front Air Bag Features WARNING   Continued     The Advanced Front Air Bag system provides output   4 Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers    appropriate to the severity and type of collision as or attempt to open them manually  You may damage  determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller  ORC   the air bags and you could be injured because the air    which may receive information from the front impact bags may no longer be functional  The protective  sensors     WARNING     e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag    covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open  only when the air bags are inflating      Do not drill  cut or tamper with the knee bolster in  any way    e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster  such as alarm lights  stereos  citizen band radios  etc     on the instrument panel  because any
152. epair requiring lines to be disconnected   should be done by an experienced technician           MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323    A C Air Filter 4  Disengage the retaining tabs that secure the air filter    WARNING     access door to the HVAC housing        7      Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is Nf SN n  ia  operating or personal injury may result        5 a ili              DY 2            The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind d p  AC  the glove box  Perform the following procedure to re  s     e    PCD    LE e  place the filter  pra     1  Open the glove compartment and remove all contents  EE L VERI  A  Y Lj    pla        2  Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and  lower the door     3  Pivot the glove compartment downward     324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE  5  Open the air filter access door         AS    cS  D                 j  lr  ME A  gt       PAY a    4    6  Remove the particulate air filters from the HVAC air  inlet housing  Pull the filter elements straight out of  the housing                                  ZA  A  D                           IET  BS    K ANA  g    L   7  Install the A C air filter with the air filter position  indicators pointing in the same direction as removal     A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325    CAUTION     The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to    indicate airflow direction through the filter  Failure  to properly install the filter will result in the need to  replace it more oft
153. er Anchors and Tether  for Children  LATCH  feature also can be used to hold  infant and child restraint systems  For more information  on LATCH  refer to  LATCH     Child Seat Anchorage  System  Lower Anchors and Tether for Children          30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II    Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the  risk of harm from a deploying air bag     1  Children 12 years old and under should always ride  buckled up in a rear seat     WARNING     Infants in rear facing child restraints should never  ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger    Advanced Front Air Bag  An air bag deployment  can cause severe injury or death to infants in that  position     Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat  belt properly  see section on Child Restraints  should be  secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt   positioning booster seats  Older children who do not use  child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should       ride properly buckled up in the rear seat  Never allow  children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under  their arm     You should read the instructions provided with your  child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly     2  All occupants should always wear their lap and  shoulder belts properly     3  The driver and front passenger seats should be moved  back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front  Air Bags room to inflate     4  Do not lean against the
154. er button will make the radio switch  between the various modes available  AM FM SAT   AUX Media Player  etc   and can also be used to select   enter an item while scrolling through menu     The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a  pushbutton in the center  The function of the left hand  control is different depending on which mode you are in     The following describes the left hand control operation in  each mode     a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183    Radio Operation    Pressing the top of the switch will    Seek    up for the next  listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch  will    Seek    down for the next listenable station     The button located in the center of the left hand control  will tune to the next preset station that you have pro   grammed in the radio preset pushbutton     Player Operation    Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next  track on the Player  Pressing the bottom of the switch  once will go to the beginning of the current track  or to  the beginning of the previous track if it is within one  second after the current track begins to play     If you press the switch up or down twice  it plays the  second track  three times  it will play the third  etc     CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE    To keep a CD DVD in good condition  take the following  precautions     1  Handle the disc by its edge  avoid touching the surface     2  If the disc is stained  clean the surface with a soft cloth   wiping from center to
155. erating  for  further information   Moving the shift lever downward      or upward     while in the AutoStick   position  next  to the Drive position  will manually select the trans   mission gear  and will display the current gear in the  instrument cluster as 6  5  4  3  2  1     Gear Ranges    DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or  NEUTRAL into another gear range     NOTE  After selecting any gear range  wait a moment to  allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating   This is especially important when the engine is cold     PARK    This range supplements the parking brake by locking the  transmission  The engine can be started in this range   Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in  motion  Apply the parking brake when leaving the  vehicle in this range     When parking on a level surface  you may place the shift  lever in PARK first  and then apply the parking brake        218 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    When parking on a hill  apply the parking brake before  placing the shift lever in PARK  otherwise the load on the  transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to  move the shift lever out of PARK  As an added precau   tion  turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill  grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade     WARNING     e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the  parking brake  Always apply the parking brake  fully when parked to guard against vehicle move   ment and possible injury or damage       Yo
156. eration  If replacement is ever necessary  install ONLY  the correct type thermostat  Other designs may result in  unsatisfactory engine coolant  antifreeze  performance   poor gas mileage  and increased emissions        338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Brake System   In order to assure brake system performance  all brake  system components should be inspected periodically   Refer to the    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper  maintenance intervals     WARNING     Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and  possibly a collision  Driving with your foot resting or    riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally  high brake temperatures  excessive lining wear  and  possible brake damage  Riding the brakes may also  reduce braking capacity in an emergency        Brake Master Cylinder   The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked  when performing under hood services  or immediately if  the    Brake Warning Light    is on     Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before  removing the cap  If necessary  add fluid to bring the  fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake  fluid reservoir  Fluid level can be expected to fall as the  brake pads wear  The brake fluid level should be checked  when the pads are replaced  However  low fluid level  may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed     NOTE  If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans   mission  the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both  the brake system 
157. ess the switch to the left to turn on the left light           Map Reading Light Switches  CAUTION     Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the    switch is in the center position or that the lights are  off to avoid draining the battery        UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111    Interior Light Timing  Center Position     There are four different modes of operation that can be  activated in this position     e    e    When one door is opened a 3 minute timer is activated     When the key is removed from the ignition  within two  minutes of the ignition being turned off   a 10 second  timer is activated     When the doors are unlocked with Key Fob a 10 second  timer is activated     When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights  will turn off     Interior Light Timing  On Right Position     o    When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated     NOTE  The timer is deactivated when the key is moved  into the ON RUN position        112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MN  WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS    The windshield wiper washer lever is located on the  right side of the steering column     NOTE  The windshield wipers washers will only oper   ate with the ignition in the ON RUN position     Front Windshield Wiper Operation       There are five different modes of operation for the front  windshield wipers  The windshield wiper lever can be  raised or lowered to access these modes     Windshield Wiper Lever  Windshield Wiper O
158. eter in inches  in              215   Section width in millimeters  mm        246 STARTING AND OPERATING HN       EXAMPLE        65   Aspect ratio in percent           Ratio of section height to section width of tire  10 5   Section width in inches  in   R   Construction code        R  means radial construction            D    means diagonal or bias construction       15   Rim diameter in inches  in   Service Description   95   Load Index      A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry  H   Speed Symbol      A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to  its load index under certain operating conditions        The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under  specified operating conditions  i e   tire pressure  vehicle loading  road conditions  and  posted speed limits                 A STARTING AND OPERATING 247       EXAMPLE        Load Identification      blank       Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load  SL  tire       Extra Load  XL    Extra load  or reinforced  tire       Light Load  LL    Light load tire       C  D  E  E G   Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure       Maximum Load    Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry       this tire       Maximum Pressure    Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for ON         
159. fety Checks You Should Make Outside  The Vehicle    Tires    Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear  patterns  Check for stones  nails  glass  or other objects  lodged in the tread or sidewall  Inspect the tread for cuts  and cracks  Inspect sidewalls for cuts  cracks and bulges   Check the wheel bolts for tightness  Check the tires   including spare  for proper cold inflation pressure     Lights    Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and  exterior lights while you work the controls  Check turn  signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument  panel     Door Latches  Check for positive closing  latching  and locking   Fluid Leaks    Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel   engine coolant  oil  or other fluid leaks  Also  if gasoline  fumes are detected or if fuel  power steering fluid  or  brake fluid leaks are suspected  the cause should be  located and corrected immediately        UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE                                                                                                             CONTENTS   E MIRRORS Sarco needs hob eda 85 REAR SEATS RP 96 mmm  Inside Day Night Mirror          o    o o   85 HEAD RESTRAINTS                000  101  Automatic Dimming Mirror     If Equipped    86 M OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD        104  Conversation Mirror     If Equipped           OF M LIGHTS isse dO A Son 106  Power Mirrors          leen 88 Multifunction LevVer       o o o ooo o ooo 
160. ff    This is the normal position of the wiper lever     a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113    Low Speed Front Windshield Washer Operation   Push the lever downward to the second detent  The wipers Pull the windshield wiper washer lever toward the   will operate at low speed  steering wheel to activate the washers  The wipers will   High Speed activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is  released     Push the lever downward to the third detent  The wipers  will operate at high speed     Manual High Speed Mist       Push the lever upward from the off position  The wipers  will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray  from a passing vehicle  This operation will continue until  the lever is released  When the lever is released  the  wipers will return to the off position and automatically  shut off        Front Windshield Washer Operation    114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In    CAUTION     e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving  through an automatic car wash  Damage to the  windshield wipers may result if the wiper control  is left in any position other than off    In cold weather  always turn off the wiper switch  and allow the wipers to return to the    Park    posi   tion before turning off the engine  If the wiper    switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the  windshield  damage to the wiper motor may occur  when the vehicle is restarted     Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents  the windshield w
161. fill                     332  Inspection  6 045445 ee eb ee masasi s 336  Points to Remember       o oooooocooo ooo  335    Pressure Cap segue ke e Re ea s 335   Selection of Coolant  Antifreeze               333  Corrosion Protections esere tenerte rar ERER 343  Cruise Lights rui ce swat RR aii n 155  Cupholders voii a 143  Customer Assistance        ooo    o      372  Data Recorder  Event               o oo o ooo   56  Daytime Running Lights                      107  Deck Lid  Emergency Release        o o o ooooo o   27  Defroster  Windshield                         78  Diagnostic System  Onboard                   314  Dipsticks   Automatic Transmission                    342  Disposal   Antifreeze  Engine Coolant                   336  Door Locks 4k he ae doe x ee ee WO CRUS 20  Door Opener  Garage        esce ee rA s 129    Downshifting exces ape Rea reda da 213    A INDEX 385    Driving   Through Flowing  Rising  or Shallow   Standing Water  i4 bte ori ri dee 230  Electric Remote Mirrors        oooo oooooo ooo    88  Electronic Brake Control SysteM                236   Brake Assist System       oooo ooooooooo o   236  Electronic Roll Mitigation  ERM                 243  Electronic Speed Control  Cruise Control           117  Electronic Stability Control  ESC                 239  Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC        126  Emergency Deck Lid Release                   27  Emergency  In Case of   Hazard Warning Flasher                    283   Jacki   sse Re RR 
162. flat towed  at any legal  highway speed  for any distance  if the manual transmis     sion is in NEUTRAL     CAUTION     DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an    automatic transmission  Damage to the drivetrain  will result  If these vehicles require towing  make  sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground              280 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    NOTE  This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or  vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the  ground     CAUTION     Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require     ments can cause severe transmission damage  Dam   age from improper towing is not covered under the  New Vehicle Limited Warranty           WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES                                  CONTENTS  ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS             283  B IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS     222 283  BL TIBEHT RIT aues yd exu o aber Y ERES 284  TIREELT Storage scaricare 285  TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation        285  TIREFIT Usage Precautions                286  Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT               288  ll JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING      IE EQUIPPED isum eR RRPSRRER IEEE 294             Jack Location  aai dnd ees due CR Rec 294             Spare Tire Removal         ooo ooooooo     295          Preparations For Jacking                  296          Jacking Instructions        oooooooo o o          Spare Tire Stowage     ooooooooo ooo         Bl JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE          Preparations For Jump Start                                 Jump S
163. for replacement  The  quality of replacement filters varies considerably  Only  high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient  service  MOPAR   engine oil filters are high quality oil  filters and are recommended     Engine Air Cleaner Filter    Refer to the    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper  maintenance intervals     WARNING     The air induction system  air cleaner  hoses  etc   can  provide a measure of protection in the case of engine  backfire  Do not remove the air induction system  air  cleaner  hoses  etc   unless such removal is necessary    for repair or maintenance  Make sure that no one is  near the engine compartment before starting the  vehicle with the air induction system  air cleaner   hoses  etc   removed  Failure to do so can result in  serious personal injury        Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection    The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies  considerably  Only high quality filters should be used to  assure most efficient service  MOPAR   engine air cleaner  filters are a high quality filter and are recommended     320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Maintenance Free Battery WARNING   Continued     Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery      Battery gas is flammable and explosive  Keep  You will never have to add water  nor is periodic main  flame or sparks away from the battery  Do not use    tenance required  a booster battery or any other booster source with    MARNE an output greater than 1
164. fore exiting a vehicle  always apply the number of reasons  A child or others could be  parking brake  shift the transmission into PARK  seriously or fatally injured  Children should be    turn the engine OFF  and remove the ignition key  warned not to touch the parking brake  brake pedal   Once the key is removed  the shift lever is locked in or the shift lever    PARK  securing the vehicle against unwanted   Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle  or   movement  in a location accessible to children   or in a location    When leaving the vehicle  always remove the igni  accessible to children  A child could operate power   tion key and lock your vehicle  windows  other controls  or move the vehicle         Continued     216 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    Key Ignition Park Interlock    This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter   lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK  before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF  position  The key can only be removed from the ignition  when the ignition is in the OFF position  and once  removed  the shift lever is locked in PARK     Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System    This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift  Interlock System  BTSI  that holds the shift lever in PARK  unless the brakes are applied  To move the shift lever out  of PARK  the ignition switch must be turned to the  ON RUN position  engine running or not   then press  the brake pedal and the shifter release but
165. g  16  Programming Additional Transmitters    Refer to Sentry Key    Customer Key Programming        If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter   contact your authorized studio for details        20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    Request For Additional Remote Controls    The system can recognize up to 8 remote controls  Should  a new remote control be necessary  go to an authorized  studio  taking an ID document and the car ownership  documents     General Information    This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with  RS 210 of Industry Canada  Operation is subject to the  following conditions     1  This device may not cause harmful interference     2  This device must accept any interference that may be  received including interference that may cause unde   sired operation     NOTE  Changes or modifications not expressly ap   proved by the party responsible for compliance could  void the user s authority to operate the equipment     If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal   distance  check for these two conditions    1  Weak battery in RKE transmitter  The expected life of  the battery is from one to two years    2  Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station  tower  airport transmitter  and some mobile or CB  radios     DOOR LOCKS    Press the central LOCK UNLOCK button  The button  has an LED that indicates whether the doors are locked  or unlocked    e LED ON  doors locked  Pressing the central LOCK   UNLOCK bu
166. g abrasive compounds and power buffing  that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish     CAUTION       Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials  such as steel wool or scouring powder that will  scratch metal and painted surfaces       Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi  8 274 kPa   can result in damage or removal of paint and decals      If the engine compartment is washed with an high  pressure jet  keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches   20 centimeters  from filler surface        Special Care  e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive    near the ocean  hose off the undercarriage at least once  a month     e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges    of the doors  rocker panels  and trunk be kept clear and  open     Aa MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345    e    e     e     If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint   touch them up immediately  The cost of such repairs is  considered the responsibility of the owner     If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar  cause that destroys the paint and protective coating   have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible  The  cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of  the owner     If you carry special cargo such as chemicals  fertilizers   de icer salt  etc   be sure that such materials are well  packaged and sealed     If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads  consider  mud or stone shields behind each wheel     Use MOPAR   Touch Up
167. gnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams   charts and detailed illustrations  These practical manuals  make it easy for students and technicians to find and  fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and  features  They show exactly how to find and correct  problems the first time  using step by step troubleshoot   ing and drivability procedures  proven diagnostic tests  and a complete list of all tools and equipment     Owner s Manuals    These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the  assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac   quaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles  vehicles  Included are starting  operating  emergency  and maintenance procedures as well as specifications   capabilities and safety tips     e Call toll free at    1 800 890 4038  U S    1 800 387 1143  Canada    Or   e Visit us on the Worldwide Web at   www techauthority com    DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM  TIRE QUALITY GRADES    The following tire grading categories were established by  the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  The  specific grade rating assigned by the tire   s manufacturer  in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on  your vehicle     All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety  requirements in addition to these grades        378  Treadwear    The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating  based on  the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  conditions on a specified government test course 
168. hat may cause unde   sired operation     NOTE  Changes or modifications not expressly approved  by the party responsible for compliance could void the  user   s authority to operate the equipment     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15    VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM     IF EQUIPPED    The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors  for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau   thorized operation  While the Vehicle Security Alarm is  armed  interior switches for door locks and liftgate  release are disabled  If something triggers the alarm  the  Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au   dible and visible signals  the horn will pulse  the park  lamps and or turn signals will flash  and the Vehicle  Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash     To Arm The System    1  Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out  of the vehicle     2  Lock the door using either the Central Lock Unlock  switch or the Remote Keyless Entry  RKE  transmitter  and close all doors     3  The horn will sound and the Vehicle Security Light in  the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approxi   mately 16 seconds  This shows that the Vehicle Secu   rity Alarm is arming  During this period  if a door is  opened  the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN  or  the power door locks are unlocked in any manner  the  Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm   After approximately 16 seconds  the Vehicle Security  Light will flash slowly  This sho
169. hat the engine will not be overbur   dened     214 STARTING AND OPERATING Ha  AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION     IF EQUIPPED NOTE  You must press and hold the brake pedal while    shifting out of PARK   CAUTION     WARNING     Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow    ing precautions are not observed    e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to  a complete stop    e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle    has come to a complete stop and the engine is at  idle speed      Do not shift between PARK  REVERSE  NEUTRAL   or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed      Before shifting into any gear  make sure your foot  is firmly pressing the brake pedal        e Itis dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL  if the engine speed is higher than idle speed   If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal     the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in  reverse  You could lose control of the vehicle and  hit someone or something  Only shift into gear  when the engine is idling normally and your foot is  firmly pressing the brake pedal         Continued     A STARTING AND OPERATING 215    WARNING   Continued  WARNING   Continued       Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Never leave children alone in a vehicle  or with  those in or near the vehicle  As with all vehicles  access to an unlocked vehicle  Allowing children to  you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a  running  Be
170. hear a  click      Automatic Locking Retractor Mode  ALR       If Equipped    In this mode  the shoulder belt is automatically pre   locked  The belt will still retract to remove any slack in  the shoulder belt  The Automatic Locking Mode is avail   able on all passenger seating positions with a combi   nation lap shoulder belt  Use the Automatic Locking    Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating  position that has a belt with this feature  Children  12 years old and under should always be properly  restrained in the rear seat     How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode  1  Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt     2  Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until  the entire belt is extracted     3  Allow the belt to retract  As the belt retracts  you will  hear a clicking sound  This indicates the safety belt is  now in the Automatic Locking Mode     How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode    Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it  to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking  Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive  emergency   locking mode     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37    WARNING     e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if  the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor   ALR  feature or any other seat belt function is not    working properly when checked according to the  procedures in the Service Manual    e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly  could i
171. hen  the compressor is not running      The system allows the following to be set or adjusted  manually     e driver passenger side air temperature     e    fan speed  continuous variation      air distribution to seven positions       compressor enablement     e     rapid defrosting demisting function     e air recirculation   e heated rear window   e system deactivation     NOTE  The climate control system detects the passenger  compartment temperature using a mean radiant tem   perature sensor located in the interior rear view mirror  and protected by a specific cover  Obstructing the field of  view of this sensor with any object could cause the  climate control system to operate with less than optimal  efficiency     Switching On the Climate Control System    The climate control system can be switched on in differ   ent ways  it is advisable to press the AUTO button and  turn the knobs to set the desired temperatures     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195    In this way the system operates completely automatically  to adjust the temperature  quantity and distribution of  the air introduced into the passenger compartment  It  also manages the air recirculation function and the acti   vation of the air conditioning compressor     During automatic operation  you can change the set  temperatures  air distribution and fan speed at any time  by using the relevant buttons or knobs  the system will  automatically change the settings to adjust to the new  requirements     D
172. here may be a light that blinks when the garage door  opener  device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode     NOTE  You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next  step after the LEARN button has been pressed     6     Return to the vehicle and press the programmed  HomeLink   button twice  holding the button for two  seconds each time   If the garage door opener device  activates  programming is complete     NOTE  If the garage door opener device does not acti   vate  press the button a third time  for two seconds  to  complete the training     To program the remaining two HomeLink   buttons   repeat each step for each remaining button  DO NOT  erase the channels     Reprogramming A Single HomeLink   Button    To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained   follow these steps     1  Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     2  Press and hold the desired HomeLink   button until  the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds   Do not release the button     3  Without releasing the button proceed with    Program   ming A Rolling Code    Step 2 and follow all remaining  steps     A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133  Programming A Non Rolling Code    For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured  before 1995     1   2     Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in  3 to 8 cm   away from the HomeLink   button you wish to program  while keeping the HomeLink   indicator light in view     5  Press and hold the
173. hout MMT be used in your vehicle  The MMT content  of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump   therefore  you should ask your gasoline retailer whether  the gasoline contains MMT  MMT is prohibited in Federal  and California reformulated gasoline     Materials Added To Fuel    All gasoline sold in the United States is required to  contain effective detergent additives  Use of additional  detergents or other additives is not needed under normal  conditions and they would result in additional cost   Therefore  you should not have to add anything to the  fuel     Fuel System Cautions    CAUTION     Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle   s  performance     e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law   Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor   mance and damage the emissions control system         Continued     A STARTING AND OPERATING 275    CAUTION   Continued     e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition  malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to  overheat  If you notice a pungent burning odor or  some light smoke  your engine may be out of tune  or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser   vice  Contact your authorized studio for service    assistance    The use of fuel additives  which are now being  sold as octane enhancers  is not recommended   Most of these products contain high concentrations  of methanol  Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor   mance problems resulting from the use of such  fuels or additives i
174. ight     es     If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving  it  indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system  is not functioning and that service is required  However   the conventional brake system will continue to operate  normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on     This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System   ABS   The light will turn on when the ignition  switch is turned to the ON RUN position and  may stay on for as long as four seconds     If the ABS light is on  the brake system should be serviced  as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock  brakes  If the ABS light does not turn on when the  ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position  have  the light inspected by an authorized studio        166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    29  Power Steering System Warning   This light is used to manage the electrical  e warning of the EPS  Power Steering System     When the ignition is turned to the ON RUN  position  the warning light will illuminate mo   mentarily  If the warning light stays on  cycle the ignition  to the OFF position and back to ON RUN  If the warning  light stays on  contact your authorized Fiat Studio     If the warning light switches on while driving you may  not have steering assistance  Although it will still be  possible to steer the car  the effort needed to operate the  steering wheel could be increased  contact an authorized  Fiat Studio as soon as possible     Refer to  Power Steering  in 
175. ight will turn off  If the  ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system  it  turns on the Air Bag Warning Light  either momentarily  or continuously  A single chime will sound if the light  comes on again after initial startup     It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru   ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is  noted that could affect the air bag system  The diagnos   tics also record the nature of the malfunction     48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II    WARNING     Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru   ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags  to protect you in a collision  If the light does not come    on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned  on  stays on after you start the vehicle  or if it comes  on as you drive  have an authorized studio service the  air bag system immediately        Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag  Inflator Units    The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag  Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering  wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel     When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad   vanced Front Air Bags  it signals the inflator units  A large  quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the  Advanced Front Air Bags  Different air bag inflation rates  are possible  based on several factors  including the  collision type and severity  The steering wheel hub trim  cover and the upper right side of
176. ild and others could be  site for additional information  http    www tc gc ca  badly injured  Any child riding m dE  eng roadsafety  safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm Should be m a proper restraunt tor the child s aize        a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59    Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles       Child Size  Height  Weight or Age    Recommended Type of Child Restraint       Infants and Toddlers    Children who are two years old or   younger and who have not reached   the height or weight limits of their  child restraint    Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible  Child Restraint  facing rearward in the  rear seat of the vehicle       Small Children    Children who are at least two years old  or who have out grown the height or  weight limit of their rear facing child   restraint    Forward Facing Child Restraint with a  five point Harness  facing forward in  the rear seat of the vehicle       Larger Children    Children who have out grown their  forward facing child restraint  but are  too small to properly fit the vehicle s   seat belt    Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the  vehicle seat belt  seated in the  rear seat of the vehicle       Children Too Large for  Child Restraints          Children 12 years old or younger  who  have out grown the height or weight  limit of their booster seat       Vehicle Seat Belt  seated in the  rear seat of the vehicle          60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II    Inf
177. ill result in the oil level at the full  end of the indicator range     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317    CAUTION     Do not overfill the engine with oil  Overfilling the  engine with oil will cause oil aeration  which can    lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil  temperature  This loss of oil pressure and increased  oil temperature could damage your engine        Change Engine Oil    The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is  time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance   Refer to the  Maintenance Schedule  for further informa   tion     NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter   vals exceed 10 000 miles  16 000 km  or twelve months   whichever occurs first        Engine Oil Selection    For best performance and maximum protection for tur   bocharged engines under all types of operating condi   tions  the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine  oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of  Chrysler Material Standard MS 10896     American Petroleum Institute  API  Engine Oil  Identification Symbol    This symbol means that the oil  has been certified by the American  Petroleum Institute  API  The  manufacturer only recommends  API Certified engine oils     318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    CAUTION     Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the    chemicals can damage your engine  Such damage is  not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty        Engine Oil Viscosity   1 4L Turbo  SAE Grade     S
178. in oxygenates and are  specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and  improve air quality     The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso   lines  Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro   vide excellent performance and durability of engine and  fuel system components     Gasoline Oxygenate Blends    Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen   ates such as 10  Ethanol  MTBE  and ETBE  Oxygenates are  required in some areas of the country during the winter  months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions  Fuels  blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle     CAUTION     Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E 85    Ethanol  Use of these blends may result in starting  and driveability problems and may damage critical  fuel system components        Problems that result from using methanol gasoline  blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer   While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol  it  does not have the negative effects of Methanol     274 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    MMT In Gasoline    MMT  Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl   is a manganese containing metallic additive that is  blended into some gasoline to increase octane  Gasoline  blended with MMT provides no performance advantage  beyond gasoline of the same octane number without  MMT  Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug  life and reduces emissions system performance in some  vehicles  The manufacturer recommends that gasoline  wit
179. ine  iii a CR hae eR 316  Capacity   eek ee dete tae dog ead as 359  Change Interval           0 0    000 00000  317  AA said sog a agi and dac 316  Disposal  oi sce nkosi a ane ad ane be eben 318  Filter aux co OES a ea ES Na wee ae a 319  Filter Disposal osease raakana ra n fae ae aa 318    Identification Logo        ooooooommomoo agn 317   Materials Added to        oooo oooomoooo o    318   Recommendation               0 000000  317   VISCOSILY  cur cene SRA RO RAUS TR Ra Re 318  Oil Filter  Selection             o oooooo o oo o  319  Onboard Diagnostic SysteM       oooomoooo oo  314  Opener  Garage Door  HomeLink                 129  Operating Precautions       less 314  Operator Manual  Owner s Manual                4  Overheating  Engine       oooooooooooooo ooo 158  Owner s Manual  Operator Manual                4  PamtCar   alii VEN ERR ia ae Mons 343  Parking Drake  iere x pee Ee ie 232  Park Sense System  Rear      ooooooommoooo oo  120  Passing Light   csse e n 108  Dp  ETE 74  Placard  Tire and Loading Information            250    A INDEX 391    Power   IVIELOES  as a 88   SUnrOO   oca nu pu ee 138   WildOWS   26244 anb RR eS Eat 24  Power Steering Fluid  sis egaman ie ee 361  Pregnant Women and Seat Belts                 39  Preparation for Jacking           ooooooooo    296  Pretensioners   Seat Belts ora Ea a Galata d 37  Radial Ply Dites    see eri inue ey ni 257  Radio Operation          2    184  Rear Camera iria o erudi eae edes 126  Rear Liftgate  Sedan  
180. information if they have access to the  vehicle or the EDR     Child Restraints    Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all  times  including babies and children  Every state in the  United States  and every Canadian province  requires  that small children ride in proper restraint systems  This  is the law  and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it     Children 12 years or younger should ride properly  buckled up in a rear seat  if available  According to crash  statistics  children are safer when properly restrained in  the rear seats rather than in the front     There are different sizes and types of restraints for  children from newborn size to the child almost large  enough for an adult safety belt  Always check the child  seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct  seat for your child        58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM    Before buying any restraint system  make sure that it WARNING     has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety  Standards  You should also make sure that you can install   In a collision  an unrestrained child can become a  it in the vehicle where you will use it  projectile inside the vehicle  The force required to  hold even an infant on your lap could become so    NOTE  For additional information  refer to    wwwseatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK  Cana    8teat that you could not hold the child  no matter  dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web  how strong YOU  are  The ch
181. injury in a collision  The belt forces won t  be at the strong hip and pelvic bones  but across  your abdomen  Always wear the lap belt as low as    possible and keep it snug    e A twisted belt may not protect you properly  In a  collision  it could even cut into you  Be sure the belt  is straight  If you can t straighten a belt in your  vehicle  take it to your authorized studio immedi   ately and have it fixed     5  Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is  comfortable and not resting on your neck  The retrac   tor will withdraw any slack in the belt        6  To release the belt  push the red button on the buckle   The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi   tion  If necessary  slide the latch plate down the  webbing to allow the belt to retract fully     WARNING     A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and  leave you with no protection  Inspect the belt system  periodically  checking for cuts  frays  or loose parts     Damaged parts must be replaced immediately  Do  not disassemble or modify the system  Seat belt  assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they  have been damaged  bent retractor  torn webbing   etc          a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35    Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure    Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap   shoulder belt     1  Position the latch plate as close as possible to the  anchor point     2  At about 6 to 12 in  15 to 30 cm  above the latch plate   g
182. ion lever towards the steering wheel to turn on   the high beams  Push the multifunction lever toward the   instrument panel to turn off the high beams        108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II    Flash To Pass    You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by  partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer   ing wheel  This will cause the high beam headlights to  turn on until the lever is released    Parking Lights    To turn on the parking lights  remove the key     p 02 or turn the ignition to OFF LOCK position and  turn on the headlights   Turn Signals    Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows  on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show  proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights     NOTE  If either light remains on and does not flash   or there is a very fast flash rate  check for a defective  outside light bulb  If an indicator fails to light when the    lever is moved  it would suggest that the indicator bulb is  defective     Lane Change Assist    Tap the lever up or down once  without moving beyond  the detent  and the turn signal  right or left  will flash five  times then automatically turn off     Follow Me Home Headlight Delay    When this feature is selected the driver can choose to  have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time     Activation    Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF LOCK  position  and pull the multifunction lever toward the  steering wheel  within
183. ior  door handles and the door locking unlocking button     It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the  passenger compartment  serving as an obstacle to  break in attempts  e g  broken window      We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock device  each time you park your car           Safe Lock Device Location    THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17  Activating The Safe Lock Device    The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors by quickly  double pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter     The direction indicators flash three times and the LED  above the button flashes to indicate that the Safe Lock  device has been activated  If one or more of the doors are  not closed correctly  the Safe Lock device will not acti   vate  preventing a person from getting stuck inside the  passenger compartment by entering the car through  and  then closing  the open door     Deactivating The Safe Lock Device  The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically       carrying out the door unlocking operation  pressing  the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter       by turning the ignition key to the MAR position     18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME    REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY  RKE     This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and  liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft  20 m   using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry  RKE  transmit   ter  The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at  the vehicle to activate the system        0
184. iper blades from returning to the  off position  If the windshield wiper control is  turned off and the blades cannot return to the off  position  damage to the wiper motor may occur        Rear Window Wiper Washer  Activation    Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to  operate the rear window wiper as follows     e in intermittent mode when the rear window wiper is  not operating       in synchronous mode  at half the speed of the rear  window wiper  when the rear window wiper is  Operating     e in continuous mode with reverse engaged     With the windshield wipers on and reverse gear engaged   rear window wiping will be continuous in the same way     a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115       Rear Window Wiper Operation Rear Window Washer Operation  Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the Deactivation  rear window washer  Keep the windshield wiper lever  pushed for more than half a second to activate the rear  window wiper as well  Releasing the windshield wiper  lever will activate the smart washing function  as de   scribed for the windscreen wiper     The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is  released     116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN    TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN    This feature allows you to tilt the steering column  upward or downward  It also allows you to lengthen or  shorten the steering column  The tilt telescoping control  handle is located on the steering column  below the turn
185. is function switches OFF automatically after about  20 minutes or when the engine is turned OFF  It is not  switched on automatically the next time the engine is  started     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203    For versions markets where provided  press the Rear  Defrost button to activate defrosting of door mirrors and  heated nozzles  for versions  markets  where provided      NOTE  Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated  rear window over the heating filaments  to avoid damage  that might cause them to stop working properly     Switching Off The Climate Control System  Press the On Off button     With climate control system off     e air recirculation is on  thus isolating the passenger  compartment from the outside     e     the compressor is off     e     the fan is off     e     the heated rear window can be activated   deactivated     NOTE  The climate control system control unit stores the  temperatures set before the system was switched off and  restores them when any button of the system is pressed   except for the A C Control button      To restart the climate control system in fully automatic  mode press the AUTO button     Additional Heater  If Equipped     This allows the passenger compartment to be heated  more quickly in cold weather conditions     The heater switches off automatically when the required  comfort conditions are achieved     The additional heater activates automatically depending  on the environmental conditions and with engin
186. is less than  22   F   30  C   and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an  engine block heater has not been used  The Glow Plug    164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 sec   onds  An externally powered electric engine block heater  is available as optional equipment or from your autho   rized studio     The message  Plug In Engine Heater   will be displayed in  the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is  below 5  F   15  C  at the time the engine is shut off as a  reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold  start     25  Odometer   Trip Odometer   Electronic Vehicle  Information Center  EVIC  Display Area    This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has  been driven     U S  Federal regulations require that upon transfer of  vehicle ownership  the seller certify to the purchaser the  correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven  If your  odometer needs to be repaired or serviced  the repair  technician should leave the odometer reading the same    as it was before the repair or service  If s he cannot do so   then the odometer must be set at zero  and a sticker must  be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was  before the repair or service  It is a good idea for you to  make a record of the odometer reading before the repair   service  so that you can be sure that it is properly reset  or  that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer  must be 
187. is possible to set one of the seven possible air  distributions manually    e Up Arrow   Air flow to the windshield and front    side window diffusers to defrost them  Use Defrost  mode with maximum temperature settings for best    windshield and side window defrosting  When the  defrost mode is selected  the blower will automatically  default to medium high     Right Arrow     Air flow at central and side dashboard  vents to ventilate the chest and the face during the hot  season     Down Arrow   Air flow to the front and rear footwell  diffusers  This air distribution setting heats the passen   ger compartment most quickly  giving a prompt sen   sation of warmth     Right Down Arrows     Air flow distributed between  footwell diffusers  hotter air  and central and side  dashboard vents  cooler air   This distribution setting  is useful in spring and autumn on sunny days     a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197    e Up Down Arrows     Air flow distributed between  footwell diffusers and windshield and front side win   dow defrosting diffusers  This distribution setting al   lows the passenger compartment to be warmed effec   tively and prevents the windows from misting     e    Up Right Arrows   Air flow distribution between  windshield defrosting diffusers and side and central  dashboard vents  This allows air to be sent to the  windshield in conditions of strong sunlight     e     Up Right Down Arrows   Air flow distribution to all  diffusers on the car     NOTE  Air 
188. ivalent in size and  type to the original equipment tires  Use snow tires only  in sets of four  failure to do so may adversely affect the  safety and handling of your vehicle     A STARTING AND OPERATING 259    Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what  was originally equipped with your vehicle and should  not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph   120 km h   For speeds above 75 mph  120 km h  refer to  original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for  recommended safe operating speeds  loading and cold  tire inflation pressures     While studded tires improve performance on ice  skid  and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be  poorer than that of non studded tires  Some states pro   hibit studded tires  therefore  local laws should be  checked before using these tire types     Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And  Wheel   If Equipped    Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and  wheel equivalent in look and function to the original  equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle  of your vehicle  This spare tire may be used in the tire    rotation for your vehicle  If your vehicle has this option  refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended  tire rotation pattern     Compact Spare Tire   The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with  radial tires  It is engineered to be used on your style  vehicle only  Since this tire has limited tread life  the    original tire should be repaired  or repla
189. ke your vehicle to a competent  mechanic     e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your  vehicle could result in a component malfunction  and effect vehicle handling and performance  This  could cause an accident        M  A  l  N  T  E  N  A  N  c  E  S   e  H  E  D  U  L  E  S  8          IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE                                                                                     CONTENTS  ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE MW WARRANTY INFORMATION               375  POR YOUR BUDE  assise dataa s aan Bra E REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS              375  Prepare For The Appointment               372 la The 50 United States And  Prepare A List  c ch nsveeues Crean 372 Washington  DC esses ces ee eso rh ms 375  Be Reasonable With Requests               372 In Canada    noaua unanou rannan 376  B IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE                372 E PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS              376  FIAT Customer Center         sese  373 W DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION  UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES          377  O Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Treadwear 378  Speech Impaired  TDD TIY                Te ie E     Traction Grades          lisse ooo    378  Service Contract    0    0 0 0 0    ce eee 374  Temperature Grades        oo oooo oo    oo  379       372 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN    SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR  YOUR VEHICLE    Prepare For The Appointment    If you are having warranty work done  be sure to have  the right papers with you  Take you
190. lded into  the tire sidewall  Refer to    Tires   General Information    in     Starting and Operating    for information on how to  properly inflate the vehicle s tires  The tire pressure will  also increase as the vehicle is driven   this is normal and  there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure     A STARTING AND OPERATING 267    The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if  the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning  limit for any reason  including low temperature effects  or  natural pressure loss through the tire     The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire  pressure as long as the condition exists  and will not turn  off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended  cold tire pressure on the placard  Once the low tire  pressure warning  Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale  Light  illuminates  you must increase the tire pressure to  the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire  Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off  The system  will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor   ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives  the updated tire pressures  The vehicle may need to be  driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph  24 km h  in  order for the TPMS to receive this information     For example  your vehicle may have a recommended  cold  parked for more than three hours  tire pressure  of 30 psi  207 kPa   If the ambient temperature is 68   F   20  C  and the measured tire
191. lies to children  The side  curtain air bag is about 3 1 2 in  9 cm  thick when it is  inflated     Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time   vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of  whether or not an air bag should have deployed     Front And Side Impact Sensors    In front and side impacts  impact sensors can aid the ORC  in determining appropriate response to impact events     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51    Enhanced Accident Response System    In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment  if the  communication network remains intact  and the power  remains intact  depending on the nature of the event  the  ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Acci   dent Response System perform the following functions       Cut off fuel to the engine     e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or  until the ignition key is turned off     e Turn on the interior lights  which remain on as long as  the battery has power or until the ignition key is  removed       Unlock the doors automatically     After the event occurs  when the system is active  the  message  Fuel Cutoff See Handbook  is displayed     Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine  compartment and on the ground near the engine com   partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and  starting the engine     System Reset Procedure    After an impact causing air bag deployment  the left and  right turn signal lights  located in th
192. ll as  inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage  at least  once a month  Use a good quality pocket type gauge to  check tire pressure  Do not make a visual judgement  when determining proper inflation  Radial tires may look  properly inflated even when they are under inflated     256 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    CAUTION     After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure  al     ways reinstall the valve stem cap  This will prevent  moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem   which could damage the valve stem        Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always  cold tire inflation pressure  Cold tire inflation pressure is  defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been  driven for at least three hours  or driven less than 1 mile   1 6 km  after a three hour period  The cold tire inflation  pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres   sure molded into the tire sidewall     Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range  of outdoor temperatures  as tire pressures vary with  temperature changes     Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi  7 kPa  per  12   E  7   C  of air temperature change  Keep this in mind  when checking tire pressure inside a garage  especially in  the winter     Example  If garage temperature   68   F  20   C  and the  outside temperature   32   F  0   C  then the cold tire  inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi  21 kPa    which equals 1 psi  7 kPa  for every 12   F  7   C  for this  
193. llision     Based on the severity and type of collision  the side air  bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be  triggered  releasing a quantity of non toxic gas  The  inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space  between the occupant and the door  The SAB fully inflate  in about 10 milliseconds  The side air bag moves at a very  high speed and with such a high force that it could injure  you if you are not seated properly  or if items are  positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates  This  especially applies to children        50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain   SABIC  Inflator Units    During collisions where the impact is confined to a  particular area of the side of the vehicle  the ORC may  deploy the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain   SABIC   depending on the severity and type of collision   In these events  the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on  the impact side of the vehicle     A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side  curtain air bag  The inflating side curtain air bag pushes  the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and  covers the window  The air bag inflates in about 30 mil   liseconds  about one quarter of the time that it takes to    blink your eyes  with enough force to injure you if you  are not belted and seated properly  or if items are  positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag  inflates  This especially app
194. located in the instrument cluster  It  features a driver interactive display  displays informa   tion such as  trip information  range  fuel consumption   average speed and travel time      Trip Button    The TRIP button  located on the right steering column  stalk  can be used to display and to reset the previously  described values             e A short button press displays the different values       A long button press resets the system and then starts a  new trip     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171    New Trip  To reset     e Press and hold the TRIP button to reset the system  manually     e When the    Trip distance    reaches 9999 9 miles or  kilometers or when the    Travel time    reaches 999 59   99 hours and 59 minutes   the system is reset  automatically     e     Disconnecting Reconnecting the battery resets the  system     NOTE  If the reset operation occurs in the presence of  the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B  only the infor   mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be  reset     Start Of Trip Procedure    With the ignition on  press and hold the TRIP button for  over one second to reset     Exit Trip    To exit the Trip function  wait until all the values have  been displayed or hold the SET ESC button for longer  than one second     Briefly press the SET ESC button to go back to the menu  screen or press and hold the SET ESC  approximately  one second  to go back to the main screen without storing  settings     172 UNDERSTANDIN
195. loths   In washing stations  clean sensors quickly keeping the  vapor jet high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in   10 cm  from the sensors  Do not scratch or poke the  sensors  Otherwise  you could damage the sensors     Park Assist System Usage Precautions  NOTE     e Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the  rear bumper is clean and clear of snow  ice  mud  dirt  or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist  system operating properly       Jackhammers  large trucks  and other vibrations could  affect the performance of Rear Park Assist        124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE  e Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly  taking CAUTION   care not to scratch or damage them  The sensors must      not be covered with ice  snow  slush  mud  dirt or   e Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is    debris  Failure to do so can result in the system not unable to recognize every obstacle  including small  working properly  The Rear Park Assist system might obstacles  Parking curbs might be temporarily de   not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper  or it tected or not detected at all  Obstacles located  could provide a false indication that an obstacle is above or below the sensors will not be detected    behind the fascia bumper  when they are in close proximity      The vehicle must be driven slowly when using  Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time  when an obstacle is detected  It is recommended  that the dri
196. low       is not available due to a    Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmission p    B     fault condition  See your  in PARK in order to warm the fluid  Normal operation          gt  s ee e authorized studio for diag   will resume once the transmission oil is sufficiently       5m nosis and service   warm     Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to  alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur   These messages are described below                    STARTING AND OPERATING 223          AAA a    MESSAGE DESCRIPTION MESSAGE DESCRIPTION  SHIFT NOT The gear position requested SHIFT TO The transmission has shifted  ALLOWED by the driver is currently NEUTRAL   itself into NEUTRAL  due   blocked  This occurs if THEN D or R to a fault condition  or over   heat due to excessive idling    when stopped in DRIVE  with the brakes released    but the shift lever remains   in gear  Shift into NEU   TRAL and then back into  gear for continued driving   If the transmission will not  re engage  see your autho   rized studio     NEUTRAL is requested  while moving  with the  throttle opened   if  REVERSE is requested  while moving  at 6 mph   10 km h  or faster   if  DRIVE is requested while  moving backwards  at  6 mph  10 km h  or faster    or if 3rd gear or higher is  requested at a stop  Make  sure the vehicle is stopped  before engaging DRIVE  or REVERSE                             224 STARTING AND OPERATING HN             MESSAGE DESCRIPTION MESSAGE D
197. ls or wheel housings     A STARTING AND OPERATING 271    4  Using tire chains on the vehicle  4  This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle  a    5  Using wheels  tires not equipped with TPM sensors  E oo e Ties ure OO    NOTE  Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare  wheel and tire assembly     1     The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure  monitoring sensor  Therefore  the TPMS will not moni   tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire       If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road    tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn   ing limit  upon the next ignition key cycle  a chime will  sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light  will still turn ON due to the low tire       However  after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes    above 15 mph  24 km h   the Tire Pressure Monitoring  Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and  then remain on solid     Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and  then remain on solid       Once you repair or replace the original road tire and    reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare  tire  the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire  Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFE  as  long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure  warning limit in any of the four active road tires  The  vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes  above 15 mph  24 km h  in order for the TPMS to  receive this information        
198. ly press the MENU button     MPH        km h      then    Off    will flash on the display  according to  previous setting        Press the UP A or DOWN Y button to select display    deactivation    Off        MPH    or    km h          Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu    screen  or press and hold the MENU button  approxi   mately one second  to go back to the main screen     Trip B Data  Trip B On     Through this option  it is possible to activate  On  or  deactivate  Off  the Trip B  partial trip  display     For further information see    Trip Computer        For activation   deactivation  proceed as follows     1     2     Briefly press the MENU button     On    or    Off    will  flash on the display  according to previous setting      Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to select the  setting       Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu    screen  or press and hold the MENU button  approxi   mately one second  to go back to the main screen  without storing the settings        176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL  Set Date    This function may be used to set the date  day   month    year    To change the date proceed as follows     1  Briefly press the MENU button and    year    will flash  on the display     2  Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting     3  Briefly press the MENU button and  month  will flash  on the display     4  Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting     5  Briefly press the MENU button and  day  will flash  o
199. m   Make sure the valve stem is free of debris  Reconnect  the Sealant Hose  6  to the valve stem  Check that the  Mode Select Knob  5  is in the Sealant Mode position  and not Air Mode  Press the Power Button  4  to turn  On the TIREFIT kit     2  Connect the Power Plug  8  to a different 12 Volt power  outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle  if available   Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the  TIREFIT kit     3  The Sealant Bottle  1  may be empty due to previous  use  Call for assistance        290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN    NOTE  If the Mode Select Knob  5  is on Air Mode and  the pump is operating  air will dispense from the Air  Pump Hose  7  only  not the Sealant Hose  6      If the sealant  white fluid  does flow through the  Sealant Hose  6      1     Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no  longer flowing through hose  typically takes 30    70 seconds   As the sealant flows through the Sealant  Hose  6   the Pressure Gauge  3  can read as high as 70  psi  5 Bar   The Pressure Gauge  3  will decrease  quickly from approximately 70 psi  5 Bar  to the actual  tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle  1  is empty       The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi     ately after the Sealant Bottle  1  is empty  Continue to  operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure  indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side  latch pillar  recommended pressure   Check the tire  pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge  3
200. maad 329    Cooling System  lt   os cscs less  Brake System   sos ri due cea mikes E       Manual Transmission     If Equipped    Automatic Transmission     If Equipped        341    O Appearance Care And Protection From    COMO  ir aa Re ae a 343    312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN                            MM FUSES       Re Rm ehem ees 349  Underhood Fuses       o o oooo o ooooooo o    349  Interior FUSES  ias ee a a a E 352  Rear Interior Fuses            o o oooooo o   354   WM VEHICLE STORAGE                 00   355   M REPLACEMENT BULBS                   356   E BULB REPLACEMENT                    357  Headlamps siese 44 4 04445 reb REG 357                   Front Turn Signal  Parking And Daytime  Running Lamps           llle 357                                              Front Fog Lamps    3 era Eee aes 358  Front Rear Side Marker Lamps             358  Rear Tail  Stop  Backup And Turn Signal  Lamps 264224 sees E reser br gs 358  Center High Mounted Stop Lamp  CHMSL     358  B FLUID CAPACTTIES       oo ococccoooo o    359  E FLUIDS  LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE  PARTS ea end dre ah a ine aera de PERS poe 360  Engine   5255 sud oai e doe DU end ded 360  CHASSIS  kr Hales CRA Bae  RR Re ees 361                MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313  ENGINE COMPARTMENT     1 4L TURBO                                                          1     Air Cleaner Filter 4     Battery 7     Coolant Pressure Cap  2     Engine Oil Dipstick 5     Front Distribution Unit  Fuses  8     Coolant Pre
201. matic Locking Retractor Mode  ALR         If Equipped  eseese remessas e masea    Auto     Relocking  Only For Rear Doors           Power Window Switches                   B LIETGATE  scssepisiepessoosro at bes aes  Liftgate Emergency Release                B OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS   aoaaa  Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions        Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure        Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions            23 Energy Management Feature                             Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System                   24  BeltAlertB  2 06 classi e ees  24 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women            27 Supplemental Restraint System  SRS        BIE Bags  as 08 Rash ee EOS E Rer uud                         Child Restraints                   Seat Belt Pretensioners                     Advanced Front Air Bag Features           Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls         Event Data Recorder  EDR                   Transporting Pets        oooooooo oo       36 Bl ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS         a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11                                        B SAFETY TIPS  ia04 25 rie ee tee owe esses 76 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside    The Vehicle           lees 77  Transporting Passengers       o o o ooooooo       76  cor c     ce       Outside The Vehicle                         12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MI    A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS    The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry  RKE   transmit
202. mera  Rear iia ba hese aon E 126    Capacities  Antifreeze  Engine Coolant            359    Capacities  Fluid  sise sieaa ao EA oe bates 359  Caps  Filler   Piele perias tedegi Iv eto E Rn 310   Oil  ENGINE   s vesc woes eai ee wR eae 318  Carbon Monoxide Warning s es cess ces espt o    76  Cargo Area Peat  r  s       aou ibas spa hea det 146  Car Washes  is s e tamea does tags Eein ia 344  Cellular Phone sucio dad a 184  Center High Mounted Stop Light               358  Chains  TUB  iau abs asa 264  Changing A Flat Tires es secere etnea era hinia 294  Chart  Tire Sizing   sisse n 245  Check Engine Light  Malfunction Indicator   Light   2a 44s grrr caca 161  Checking Your Vehicle For Safety                 76  Checks  Safety   aa aia PETS e  Child Restralt voces cs isto m a  Child Safety Locks    Clean Air Gasoline       304 INDEX II    Cleaning  Wheels    Rp tai R Rem d uaa 345  Windshield Wiper Blades                    326  Cl  tchi     uu iacere eee Rp recae warte dc n 338  Clutch Fluide   ess RE ed Rs 338  Compact Disc  CD  Maintenance                183  Compact Spare life    scc rk eR ae 259  Connector  ICI inst Ea ure beste uut esM 181  Universal Consumer Interface  UCI             181  Contract  Service            ooo eee 374  Coolant  Antifreeze        o o ooo oooocooo ooo    359  Cooling System  orere lees 332  Adding Coolant  Antifreeze                  334  Coolant Level   22 RR be Rx 332  Disposal of Used Coolant           o oo o o     336  Drain  Flush  and Re
203. n a timely manner     This is why you should always talk to an authorized  studio service manager first  Most matters can be re   solved with this process     e If for some reason you are still not satisfied  talk to the  general manager or owner of the authorized studio   They want to know if you need assistance     e If an authorized studio is unable to resolve the con   cern  you may contact the manufacturer   s customer  center     Any communication to the manufacturer   s customer  center should include the following information     e Owner s name and address     Owner s telephone number  home and office   Authorized studio name   Vehicle Identification Number  VIN    Vehicle delivery date and mileage    FIAT Customer Center  P O  Box 21 8004   Auburn Hills  MI 48321 8004  Phone   888  242 6342       374    Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech  Impaired  TDD TTY     To assist customers who have hearing difficulties  the  manufacturer has installed special TDD  Telecommuni   cation Devices for the Deaf  equipment at its customer  center  Any hearing or speech impaired customer  who  has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter   TTY  in the United States  can communicate with the  manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY    Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require  assistance can use the special needs relay service offered  by Bell Canada  For TTY teletypewriter users  dial 711  and for Voice callers  dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with  a 
204. n backing up even when e To avoid vehicle damage  ParkView   should only  using the Park View   Rear Back Up Camera  Always be used as a parking aid  The Park View   camera is  check carefully behind your vehicle  and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your  check for pedestrians  animals  other vehicles  ob  drive path     structions  or blind spots before backing up  You are e To avoid vehicle damage  the vehicle must be   responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView   to be able to   must continue to pay attention while backing up  stop in time when an obstacle is seen  It is recom    Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death  mended that the driver look frequently over his her  shoulder when using ParkView          NOTE  If snow  ice  mud  or any foreign substance builds  up on the camera lens  clean the lens  rinse with water   and dry with a soft cloth  Do not cover the lens     128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM    Turning ParkView   On Or Off      With Uconnect   5 0    1  Turn the Radio on   2  Press the    Settings    button   3  Press the    Safety  amp  Assistance    soft key     4  Press the check box soft key next to    Parkview    Backup Camera    to enable disable     NOTE  A check mark will appear in the selection box to  indicate the system is turned ON     Turning ParkView   On Or Off      ith Uconnect   6 5 6 5N    1  Press the    Controls    soft key located on the bot
205. n result from starting in third     A STARTING AND OPERATING 213    For most city driving you will find it easier to use only  the lower gears  For steady highway driving with light  accelerations  sixth gear is recommended     Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal  or  try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal  partially engaged  This will cause abnormal wear on the  clutch     To shift into REVERSE  pull up on the ring just below the  gear shift knob and then move into the REVERSE  R   position     Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a    complete stop     NOTE  During cold weather  until the transmission lubri   cant is warm  you may experience slightly higher shift  efforts  This is normal and not harmful to the transmission     DOWNSHIFTING    Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and  prolong engine life     CAUTION     If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift  at too high of a vehicle speed  these conditions may  cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is    selected and the clutch pedal is released  Damage to  the clutch and the transmission can result from  skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting  at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal  is held pressed  i e   not released         To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life  shift  down to second or first when descending a steep grade   When turning a corner  or driving up a steep grade   downshift early so t
206. n the display     6  Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting        NOTE  The setting will increase or decrease by one unit  each time the UP ZXor DOWN V button is pressed   Press and hold the UP Aor DOWN button to  increase  decrease the setting rapidly  Save the setting by  briefly pressing the button when you approach the  required setting       Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu  screen  or press and hold the MENU button  approxi   mately one second  to go back to the main screen  without storing the settings     Autoclose    With this function active  the doors will automatically lock  at when the vehicle s speed exceeds 12 mph  20 km h    To change the setting proceed as follows     1  Briefly press the MENU button  On  or  Off  will flash  on the display  according to the previous setting         2  Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting     3  Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu  screen  or press and hold the MENU button  approxi   mately one second  to go back to the main screen  without storing the settings     Units  Set Units     This function may be used to set the measurement unit  in three submenus     Distance        Temperature    and    Fuel  Economy        To set the required unit  proceed as follows     1  Briefly press the MENU button to display the three  sub menus     2  Press the UP Nor DOWN V button to navigate the  three sub menus     UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177    3  Select the required sub menu
207. n the following lan   guages  Italian  English  German  Portuguese  Spanish   French  Dutch  Polish and Turkish     To set the required language  proceed as follows     1  Briefly press the MENU button  The previously set     language    will flash on the display     2  Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting     3  Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu  screen  or press and hold the MENU button  approxi   mately one second  to go back to the main screen  without storing the settings     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179    Buzzer Volume  Adjusting The Failure Warning  Buzzer Volume     With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany   ing any failure warning indication can be adjusted to  one of eight volume levels     To adjust the volume proceed as follows     1  Briefly press the MENU button  The previously set  volume    level    will flash on the display     2  Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting     3  Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu  screen  or press and hold the MENU button  approxi   mately one second  to go back to the main screen  without storing the settings     Belt Buzzer  Buzzer Activation For BeltAlert    Indication     This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group  Automobiles studio has deactivated the BeltAlert   sys   tem  Refer to    Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System  BeltAlert      in    Occupant Restraints    for further infor     To reactivate this function  proceed as follows 
208. n to ensure safety shallow standing water  consider the following Caution  and prevent damage to your vehicle  and Warning before doing so     Flowing Rising Water CAUTION   WARNING     Do not drive on or across a road or path where water  is flowing and or rising  as in storm run off   Flow   ing water can wear away the road or path   s surface    e Always check the depth of the standing water  before driving through it  Never drive through  standing water that is deeper than the bottom of  the tire rims mounted on the vehicle       Determine the condition of the road or the path  that is under water and if there are any obstacles in  the way before driving through the standing water    e Do not exceed 5 mph  8 km h  when driving  through standing water  This will minimize wave  effects     and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water   Furthermore  flowing and or rising water can carry  your vehicle away swiftly  Failure to follow this  warning may result in injuries that are serious or  fatal to you  your passengers  and others around you         Continued     A STARTING AND OPERATING 231    CAUTION   Continued     e Driving through standing water may cause damage  to your vehicle s drivetrain components  Always  inspect your vehicle   s fluids  i e   engine oil  trans   mission  axle  etc   for signs of contamination  i e    fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance  after  driving through standing water  Do not continue to  operate the vehicle if any fluid appears c
209. nal air recirculation makes it possible to  reach the required heating or cooling conditions more  quickly depending on the mode selected  Do not use the  internal air recirculation function on rainy cold days as it  would considerably increase the possibility of the win   dows misting        Air Distribution Selection    Rotate the Mode Control knob to manually select one of  the five possible air distribution settings in the passenger  compartment         a    Air flow to the front rear footwell diffusers  This  air distribution allows the passenger compart    ment to be heated quickly     J      P    Air flow to the front windshield  front side win   dow and front rear footwell diffusers     Air flow distributed between central and side  dashboard vents and front rear footwell vents     Air flow to central side dashboard vents  passen   ger   s body      Air flow to windshield and side windows     A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189    Selecting the footwell windshield or only windshield  distribution activates the climate control system com   pressor  LED on A C button on  and the air recirculation  is set to  outside air     LED on Recirculation Control  button off    This logic guarantees optimum visibility at  the windows  The user can always set air recirculation  and climate control system compressor     Additional Electric Heater  If Equipped     The additional electric heater ensures more rapid passen   ger compartment heating     It activates in cold weather
210. ncrease the risk of injury in collisions        Energy Management Feature    This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy  Management feature in the front and rear outer seating  positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the  event of a head on collision     This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is  designed to release webbing in a controlled manner  This  feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on  the occupant s chest     Seat Belt Pretensioners    The seat belts for both front seating positions are  equipped with dual pretensioning devices that are de   signed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of  a collision  The dual pretensioning devices are located  on the lower B pillars and in the kick plate area  These  devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by  assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in  a collision  Pretensioners work for all size occupants   including those in child restraints     NOTE  These devices are not a substitute for proper seat  belt placement by the occupant  The seat belt still must be  worn snugly and positioned properly     The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re   straint Controller  ORC   Like the air bags  the preten   sioners are single use items  A deployed pretensioner or  a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately     38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System   BeltAlert       Belt
211. ned to    Partial Off    for specific reasons  as noted  Refer to    Partial Off    for additional informa   tion     Partial Off    The    ESC OFF    button is located in the switch bank  above the climate control  To enter the    Partial Off     mode  momentarily press the    ESC OFF    button and the     ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light    will illu   minate  To turn the ESC on again  momentarily press the    242 STARTING AND OPERATING       ESC OFF  button and the    ESC Activation  Malfunction NOTE  To improve the vehicle   s traction when driving  Indicator Light    will turn off  This will restore the normal with snow chains  or when starting off in deep snow      ESC On    mode of operation  sand  or gravel  it may be desirable to switch to the   Y    Partial Off    mode by momentarily pressing the    ESC  OFF    button  Once the situation requiring    Partial Off     mode is overcome  turn ESC back on by momentarily  pressing the    ESC OFF    button  This may be done while  the vehicle is in motion        WARNING     When in    Partial Off    mode  the TCS functionality of  ESC  except for the limited slip feature described in  the TCS section  has been disabled and the    ESC Off       Indicator Light    will be illuminated  When in    Par   ESC Off Switch tial Off    mode  the engine power reduction of TCS is  disabled  and the enhanced vehicle stability offered  by the ECS system is reduced        A STARTING AND OPERATING 243    Electronic Roll Mitigati
212. nels     a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135    If you unplugged the garage door opener device for  programming  plug it back in at this time   Reprogramming A Single HomeLink   Button   To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained   follow these steps    1  Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     2  Press and hold the desired HomeLink   button until  the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds  Do  not release the button     3  Without releasing the button proceed with     Canadian Gate Operator Programming    Step 2 and  follow all remaining steps     Using HomeLink      To operate  switch the ignition to the ON RUN position  and the press and release the programmed HomeLink    button  Activation will now occur for the programmed    device  i e   garage door opener  gate operator  security  system  entry door lock  home  office lighting  etc     The  hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at  any time  If the ignition is switched to the OFF position   HomeLink   will remain active for three minutes  During  this time  if the vehicle is locked  HomeLink   is disabled     Security    It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn  in your vehicle     To do this  press and hold the two outside buttons for  20 seconds until the red indicator flashes  Note that all  channels will be erased  Individual channels cannot be  erased     The HomeLink   Universal Transceiver is disabled when  the Vehicle Security Alarm i
213. ners and or SAB and  SABIC   if equipped air bags may deploy on both sides of  the vehicle     If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags  any  or all of the following may occur       The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause  abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and  front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold   The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or    those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna   sium floor  They are not caused by contact with  chemicals  They are not permanent and normally heal  quickly  However  if you haven t healed significantly  within a few days  or if you have any blistering  see  your doctor immediately     As the air bags deflate  you may see some smoke like  particles  The particles are a normal by product of the  process that generates the non toxic gas used for air  bag inflation  These airborne particles may irritate the  skin  eyes  nose  or throat  If you have skin or eye  irritation  rinse the area with cool water  For nose or  throat irritation  move to fresh air  If the irritation  continues  see your doctor  If these particles settle on  your clothing  follow the garment manufacturer s in   structions for cleaning        54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME  Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de  Maintaining Your Air Bag System    ployed  If you are involved in another collision  the air  bags will not be in place to protect you  WARNING   WARNING    Modifica
214. nsure that engine coolant sure to build up in the cooling system  To prevent   antifreeze  will return to the radiator from the coolant scalding or injury  do not remove the pressure cap  recovery tank  while the system is hot or under pressure     e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one  specified for your vehicle  Personal injury or en   gine damage may result     The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any  accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces        336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant    Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant  antifreeze  is  a regulated substance requiring proper disposal  Check  with your local authorities to determine the disposal  rules for your community  To prevent ingestion by ani   mals or children  do not store ethylene glycol based  engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in  puddles on the ground  Ifingested by a child or pet  seek  emergency assistance immediately  Clean up any ground  spills immediately     Coolant Level    The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual  method for determining that the coolant level is adequate   With the engine off and cold  the level of the engine coolant   antifreeze  in the bottle should be between the    MIN    and     MAX    marks     As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac   tory  the coolant bottle need only be checked once a  month     When additional engine coolant  antifreeze  is needed to
215. o    106  Folding Mirrors        o o o o oo ooo oo ooooooo  89 Headlights ou taa ti 107  Heated Mirrors     If Equipped              89 Daytime Running Lights     If Equipped       107  Sun VISOIS  edo ri eS i 89 High Beams     o ooocccoccocococcocooco o oo    107   EALS  33 3553 ii nada a Pus 9 O Flash To Pass         sse 108   FrontSeatS  02 a da ee 9             Parking Lights    20426 1 4 s4e9e ees 108    82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In       Tum Signals  o eresas e rex alo Fae ds          Lane Change Assist  Follow Me Home Headlight Delay                         Front Fog Lights     If Equipped                     Interior Lights  E WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS         Front Windshield Wiper Operation            Rear Window Wiper  Washer  E TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN  E ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL  TO ACH Vale usos cita s reed es  To Set A Desired Speed                                              To Deactivate s   sss cara a ae ae nn       112                                                                      To Resume Speed             0 000000 e 119  To Vary The Speed Setting                 119  To Accelerate For Passing                 119   REAR PARK ASSIST     IF EQUIPPED          120  Rear Park Assist Sensors                  121  Rear Park Assist Alerts                    121  Failure Indicati0NS                      123  Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System          123  Park Assist System Usage Precautions        123   E PARKVIEWO REAR B
216. o other  components or negatively impact vehicle perfor   mance  Immediately have potential malfunctions  examined by an authorized studio or qualified  repair center    Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids  that protect the performance and durability of your  vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter   vals  Do not use chemical flushes in these compo   nents as the chemicals can damage your engine   transmission  or air conditioning  Such damage is  not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty   If a flush is needed because of component malfunc   tion  use only the specified fluid for the flushing  procedure        Engine Oil  Checking Oil Level    To assure proper engine lubrication  the engine oil must  be maintained at the correct level  Check the oil level at  regular intervals  such as every fuel stop  The best time to  check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a  fully warmed engine is shut off  Do not check oil level  before starting the engine after it has sat overnight   Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will  give you an incorrect reading     Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground  and  about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut  off  will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings   Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the  dipstick  The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone   Adding 1 qt  1L  of oil when the reading is at the low end  of the indicated range w
217. o start and operate  the vehicle     NOTE  A key which has not been programmed is also  considered an invalid key  even if it is cut to fit the  ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle     If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned  to the ON RUN position  it indicates that there is a  problem with the electronics     14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME    CAUTION     e Always remove the Sentry Key   from the vehicle  and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat   tended       The Sentry Key   Immobilizer system is not com   patible with some after market remote starting  systems  Use of these systems may result in vehicle  starting problems and loss of security protection     All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have  been programmed to the vehicle electronics     Replacement Keys    NOTE  Only keys that have been programmed to the  vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle  Once  a Sentry Key   has been programmed to a vehicle  it  cannot be programmed to any other vehicle        NOTE  When having the Sentry Key   Immobilizer  System serviced  bring all vehicle keys with you to an  authorized studio     General Information    The Sentry Key   system complies with FCC rules part 15  and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada  Operation is  subject to the following conditions     e This device may not cause harmful interference     e This device must accept any interference that may be  received  including interference t
218. oceed  to this mode due to fogging risk     a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191    When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation  indicator is OFF  the Recirculation is in AUTO mode  If  the Recirculation indicator is ON  the Recirculation set   ting is manual and Recirculation is ON     3  Rear Defrost Control    Press and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn  ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside  mirrors  if equipped   An indicator will illuminate when  the rear window defroster is ON  The rear window  defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes     4  AIC Control    Press and release the A C Control Button to change the  current setting  The indicator illuminates when A C is  ON  Performing this function again will cause the A C  operation to switch into manual mode and the A C  indicator will turn OFF     5  ON OFF Control    Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control  ON OFF     6  Blower Control    Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air  forced through the climate system  Adjusting the blower  will cause automatic mode to switch to manual opera   tion  The speeds can be selected by rotating the Blower  Control adjustment knob     7  Blower Control Indicator LEDs  LEDs illuminate to visually indicate blower speed   8  Mode Control    The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air  comes from the instrument panel outlets  floor outlets   demist outlets and defrost outlets     192 UNDERSTANDING
219. of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire  Do not  exceed 55 mph  88 km h      WARNING     TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair  Have the  tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using  TIREFIT  Do not exceed 55 mph  88 km h  until the  tire is repaired or replaced  Failure to follow this  warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal  to you  your passengers  and others around you        292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  HN   E  After Driving     Pull over to a safe location  Refer to    Whenever You Stop  to Use TIREFIT    before continuing     1     Turn the Mode Select Knob  5  to the Air Mode  position       Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the    vehicle   s 12 Volt power outlet       Uncoil the Air Pump Hose  7   black in color  and    screw the fitting at the end of hose  7  onto the valve  stem       Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure    Gauge  3      If tire pressure is less than 19 psi  1 3 Bar   the tire is too  badly damaged  Do not attempt to drive the vehicle  further  Call for assistance     If the tire pressure is 19 psi  1 3 Bar  or higher     1  Press the Power Button  4  to turn on TIREFIT and  inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and  loading information label on the driver side door  opening     NOTE  If the tire becomes over inflated  press the Defla   tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom   mended inflation pressure before continuing     2  Disconnect the TIREFIT kit f
220. off the    vehicle  particularly at high speeds  resulting in per   sonal injury or property damage  Follow the roof rack  cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack              UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL                                                                      CONTENTS  E INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES            153 Trip Computer 0 425 04056 ee RR 170  E INSTRUMENT CLUSTER                   154 Trip Buttons ces kr ete em es  ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS       155 Trip Functions  ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION Values Displayed        ooo  ooo omo  o o    172  CENTER  EVIC  icc er dre cacas 166 Personal Settings  Customer Programmable  EVIC Screen error os nc bad bode de 167 Features   421m oa eb ga es dd ba pe 173  EVIC Control Buttons derese neser eiss  167 W Uconnect   RADIOS      o o oocoocccocco ooo 181  O Electronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC  E iPod   USB SD CARD MEDIA PLAYER  Setup Menta errant ete ua etre 168 CONTROL    diea entra tee o ad RT RC he a 181  Change Engine Oil Indicator System          169    152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE                                        ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS        182 B CLIMATE CONTROLS                 0 0  184  Radio Operation                   000  183 Manual Climate Control System             184  Player Operation ta ads 183 Automatic Dual Zone Climate Control System   E CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE             183  lf Equipped  oo ir basin Go Rem 190    ll RADIO OPERATION
221. ollision  lock the vehicle doors as you drive as a location accessible to children  and do not leave  well as when you park and leave the vehicle  a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the     Before exiting a vehicle  always turn the vehicle ACC or ON RUN mode  A child could operate  OFE apply the parking brake  shift the automatic power windows  other controls  or move the vehicle   transmission into PARK or the manual transmis   sion into REVERSE  and remove the Key Fob from  the ignition  When leaving the vehicle  always lock  your vehicle  An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves    e Never leave children alone in a vehicle  or with Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all  access to an unlocked vehicle  of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended    e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is  dangerous for a number of reasons  A child or others  could be seriously or fatally injured  Children  should be warned not to touch the parking brake   brake pedal or the shift lever         Continued     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23    Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open    It is possible locking the vehicle through the RKE   internal button or external key pawl  also if one or more  doors are open  At lock command request  LED is  switched ON  At closing of the last door  the vehicle  maintains the central locking status if key is not inserted  in Ignition Device  otherwise the vehicle will be unlocked  and the LED
222. on  ERM  WARNING     This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by        monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the   Many factors  such as vehicle loading  road condi   speed of the vehicle  When ERM determines that the rate   tions  and driving conditions  influence the chance  of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle sspeed   that wheel lift or rollover may occur  ERM cannot  are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift  it then   Prevent all wheel lift or rollovers  especially those  applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce  engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will  occur  ERM will only intervene during very severe or  evasive driving maneuvers     that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects  or other vehicles  The capabilities of an ERM   equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck   less or dangerous manner  which could jeopardize  the user   s safety or the safety of others        ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring  during severe or evasive driving maneuvers  It cannot  prevent wheel lift due to other factors  such as road  conditions  leaving the roadway  or striking objects or  other vehicles     244 STARTING AND OPERATING  TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION    Tire Markings    D  Lars rg  y NO       054903773    1     U S  DOT Safety Standards 4     Maximum Load   Code  TIN  5     Maximum Pressure   2     Size Designation 6     Treadwear  Traction and  3     Service Description Temperatu
223. ons below  See the section     Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat  Belt    to check what type of seat belt each seating  position has     2  Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the  tether strap of the child seat so that you can more  easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle  anchorages     3  Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for  that seating position  For some second row seats  you  may need to recline the seat and   or raise the head  restraint to get a better fit     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69    4     Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child  restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat   ing position       If the child restraint has a tether strap  connect it to the    top tether anchorage  See the section  Installing Child  Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage  for direc   tions to attach a tether anchor       Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint    rearward and downward into the seat  Remove slack  in the straps according to the child restraint manufac   turer s instructions       Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by    pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt  path  It should not move more than 1 inch  25 4 mm   in any direction     How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt    When using the LATCH attaching system to install a  child restraint  stow all ALR seat belts that are not being  used by other occupants or being use
224. ontami     nated  as this may result in further damage  Such  damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited  Warranty    Getting water inside your vehicle   s engine can  cause it to lock up and stall out  and cause serious  internal damage to the engine  Such damage is not  covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty     WARNING       Driving through standing water limits your vehi   cle   s traction capabilities  Do not exceed 5 mph   8 km h  when driving through standing water      Driving through standing water limits your vehi   cle   s braking capabilities  which increases stopping  distances  Therefore  after driving through stand   ing water  drive slowly and lightly press on the  brake pedal several times to dry the brakes      Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can  cause it to lock up and stall out  and leave you  stranded    e Failure to follow these warnings may result in  injuries that are serious or fatal to you  your pas   sengers  and others around you        232 STARTING AND OPERATING  ELECTRIC POWER STEERING    This only operates with the key turned to MAR ON and  the engine started  The steering allows the force required at  the steering wheel to be adjusted to suit driving conditions     NOTE  When turning the ignition key quickly  full power  steering functionality can be achieved after a few sec   onds     PARKING BRAKE    Before leaving the vehicle  make sure that the parking  brake is fully applied  Also  be certain to leave manual  transmi
225. or alterations to this vehicle could    seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and  may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or       death        Stamped VIN Location  NOTE  It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN        THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE                                                                                        CONTENTS 2  ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS               12 M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY  RKE              18  lemition Switch  aae ee Fe ey eee 12 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate            18  B SENTRY REY     oesegss gica earned 13 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate             18  Replacement Keys       o o o o o o ooo ooo ooo  14 Replacing The Battery In The Key With  General Information          o o o o o ooooo   14 A LONDO Stee ee eae AA RRS aE    lI VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM     IF EQUIPPED     15 Programming Additional Transmitters         19  To Arm The System    ccssscccsseeeeees 15 Request For Additional Remote Controls        20  To Disarm The System       eee 16 O General Information passeres nsis esee 20   amp  Central Lock  Unlock  Switch Sate Lock Davide      ll DOOR LOCKS      ce curia re bas 20  It Equipped    uet y eR ai 16 Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open      23    10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MI                   Child Protection Door Lock System           Rear DOOIS           o    oo    ooo       ll POWER WINDOWS              eene                                              Auto
226. or shuts off the fuel tank is full     5  Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door     NOTE  A funnel is provided  located in the spare tire  area  to open the flapper door to allow for emergency  refueling with a gas can     STARTING AND OPERATING 277           EAN       Funnel Location        N   I    Emergency Fuel Filling Procedure    CAUTION     To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling  do not  top  off  the fuel tank after filling           278 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    WARNING  TRAILER TOWING    Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended       Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the  vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is  being filled      Never add fuel when the engine is running  This is  in violation of most state and federal fire regula     tions and may cause the    Malfunction Indicator  Light  to turn on      A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a  portable container that is inside of a vehicle  You  could be burned  Always place gas containers on  the ground while filling        A STARTING AND OPERATING 279    RECREATIONAL TOWING  BEHIND MOTORHOME  ETC    Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle                            Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission  Flat Tow NONE Transmission in NOT ALLOWED  NEUTRAL  Dolly Tow Front OK OK  Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED  On Trailer ALL OK OK       NOTE  Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions  may be recreationally towed  
227. or to access the winch  Preparations For Jacking    2  Remove the jack handle and use the wrench end to 1  Park the vehicle on a firm level surface  avoiding ice or  lower the spare tire  slippery areas     3  When the spare is clear  replace a tools  WARNING   E  D Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the    vehicle close to moving traffic  pull far enough off  the road to avoid the danger of being hit when  operating the jack or changing the wheel              2  Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers        3  Set the parking brake             4  Place the shift lever in PARK  automatic transmission   or REVERSE  manual transmission      Winch Location       WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297       5  Turn Off the ignition  Jacking Instructions  e ae as  wheel diagonally opposite the jack  INLINE  ing position  For example  if chang    Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to  ing the right front tire  block the left   help prevent personal injury or damage to your  rear wheel  vehicle   060505162 e Always park on a firm  level surface as far from the  edge of the roadway as possible before raising the  NOTE  Passengers should not remain in the vehicle vehicle     while the vehicle is being jacked     e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher    e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to  be raised    e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic  transmission in PARK  a manual transmission in  REVERSE     e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
228. os reia a babes da 361  Fluid Capacities        o o o oooooooo ooo ooo    359  Fluid   aks 522a ea yo OR CX CX EA 80  Fluid Level Checks   Automatic Transmission                    342    Fluids  Lubricants and Genuine Parts            360  Fog Lights   cs dist der tires recie tis 109  Fold and Tumble Rear Seat            o         98  Freeing A Stuck Vehicle                      306  Feld eot dada PR Rar d OUR 272  AAdelng viva SR Pack Ee des 276  Additives   3 cia ad PRA a EER ees 274  Capacity  io ease isa daa dad 359  Clean Ait   ke cai  a Rida te RP ERR E ES 273  Cutoff isos ra eub Gi ale nae WO ea 51  Filler Cap  Gas Cap  resetar eee eee 157  Filler Door  Gas Cap        ooooooco oo esena  157  Gasoline  rc Ead aes REGE GP eS 272  Gage siii ias eae ule a aes EE ERE 157  Lightu    20 edi vege eme nt  ehm ors 157  Materials Added    2    0    0  cece eee 274  Octane  Ratidg ua eine ee ces e Re dia 272  Requirements   sse sses cesed daet eies 272    Tank Capacity  setes der lth pae dre eene a 359    Fuelitig iraa a a Es Dee a Gla Pace s 276  RUSOS as Srp caused  a a a ia 349  Garage Door Opener  HomeLink                 129  Gasoline  Clean Air         0 0 0 0    000  eee 273  Gasoline  Fuel e  ed cia dere RR aod a 272  Gasoline  Reformulated                       273  Gauges  Coolant Temperature               000000  157  Fuel ics  ua ra a aS 157  Odometer    2    0 0    cece eee 164  Tachometer    0 0 0 0    cece eee ees 159  Gear Ranges  sepes GR   aa 217  Gear Select Le
229. oster seat are held    Children who are two years old or who have outgrown in the velucle byte serbal    their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward   facing in the vehicle  Forward facing child seats and WARNING   convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc  WARNING     tion are for children who are over two years old or who      Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant    have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of or child restraint  It could come loose in a collision   their rear facing convertible child seat  Children should The child could be badly injured or killed  Follow  remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for the child restraint manufacturer   s directions exactly  as long as possible  up to the highest weight or height when installing an infant or child restraint     allowed by the child seat  e When your child restraint is not in use  secure it in  the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor   ages  or remove it from the vehicle  Do not leave it  loose in the vehicle  In a sudden stop or accident  it  could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause  serious personal injury     All children whose weight or height is above the  forward facing limit for the child seat should use a  belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle   s seat belts  fit properly  If the child cannot sit with knees bent over  the vehicle   s seat cushion while the child   s back is against          62 THINGS TO KNO
230. ot recom   mend deactivating BeltAlert    BeltAlert   can also be  enabled through the    Electronic Vehicle Information  Center  EVIC  Setup Menu        a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39    NOTE  Although BeltAlert amp  has been deactivated  the  Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate  while the driver s or front passenger  if equipped with  BeltAlert    seat belt remains unfastened     Seat Belts And Pregnant Women    We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts  throughout their pregnancy  Keeping the mother safe is  the best way to keep the baby safe     Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt  across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible   Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the  abdomen  That way the strong bones of the hips will take  the force if there is a collision     Supplemental Restraint System  SRS      Air Bags    This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the  driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat  belt restraint systems  The driver s Advanced Front Air  Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel  The  passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the  instrument panel  above the glove compartment  The  word AIRBAG is embossed on the air bag covers  In  addition  the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental  Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted under the instrument  panel below the steering column     NOTE  The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air  Bags
231. ot spin  the wheels faster than 15 mph  24 km h   or drive   train damage may result     cle   s wheels faster than 30 mph  48 km h  or for  longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop   ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near  a spinning wheel  no matter what the speed          Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast  may lead to transmission overheating and failure   It can also damage the tires  Do not spin the wheels  above 30 mph  48 km h  while in gear  no trans   mission shifting occurring         308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 6  Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position   If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved 7  The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL     out of the PARK position  you can use the following  procedure to temporarily move the shift lever        8  Reinstall the shift lever override access cover     1  Turn the engine OFF   2  Firmly apply the parking brake     3  Using a screwdriver or similar tool  carefully remove  the shift lever bezel and move up to the top of the shift  lever      4  Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal     5  Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the  access hole  and push and hold the override release  lever in        Shift Lever Override    a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309  TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE    NOTE  This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service                         
232. outside temperature condition     Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi  13 to 40 kPa   during operation  Do not reduce this normal pressure  build up or your tire pressure will be too low     aaa STARTING AND OPERATING 257  Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires    The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and WARNING     within posted speed limits  Where speed limits or condi   tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high   Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on  speeds  maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very   your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly   important  Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle   The instability could cause a collision  Always use  loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera    radial ply tires in sets of four  Never combine them  tion  Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment   with other types of tires    vehicle studio for recommended safe operating speeds  5  loading and cold tire inflation pressures  Tire Repair    If your tire becomes damaged  it may be repaired if it  meets the following criteria   High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi    e The tire has not been driven on when flat   mum load is dangerous  The added strain on your  tires could cause them to fail  You could have a  serious collision  Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the i f  maximum capacity at continuous speeds above     The puncture is no greater than Y     6
233. own with an  X  Below       LATCH                  Child Restraint             65 Ibs  29 5 kg                 Child   Child LATEM   Lower Anchors   Seat Belt   Top  Restraint Lower oe Seat Belt Only   Top Tether Tether Anchor  omy  Anchor  Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X  Child Restraint  29 5 kg   Rear Facing More than X  Child Restraint   65 lbs  29 5 kg   Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X  Child Restraint  29 5 kg   Forward Facing More than X          64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM    Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children  LATCH   Restraint System       Anchor  Tether     We LATCH    The next generation  of child safety           022668173       Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor   age system called LATCH  which stands for Lower  Anchors and Tethers for CHildren  The LATCH system  has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH   equipped child seats  There are two lower anchorages  located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the  seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the  seating position  These anchorages are used to install  LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle   s  seat belts  Some seating positions may have a top tether  anchorage but no lower anchorages  In these seating  positions  the seat belt must be used with the top tether  anchorage to install the child restraint  Please see the  following table for more information        a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65  LATC
234. ownward        Folding Rear Seat  5  Slowly flip the entire seat rearward and firmly lock the 2  seat into position     Folding Rear Seat Armrest    6  Raise the rear seatback and firmly lock the seatback  into position     a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101       Armrest Cupholder    HEAD RESTRAINTS    Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury  by restricting head movement in the event of a rear   impact  Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top  of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear     WARNING     The head restraints for all occupants must be properly  adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a  seat  Head restraints should never be adjusted while    the vehicle is in motion  Driving a vehicle with the  head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could  cause serious injury or death in the event of a colli   sion        102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In    Front Head Restraints    To raise the head restraint  pull upward on the head  restraint  To lower the head restraint  press the adjust   ment button  located on the base of the head restraint   and push downward on the head restraint     Adjustment Button    Rear Head Restraints     If Equipped    The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re   straints  the outboard head restraints have two adjustable  positions and the center head restraint can be stowed  when the seat is not in use  When the center seat is being  occupie
235. p     CAUTION  Turbo Charger  Cool Down  E      Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it   This vehicle is equipped with an after run pump to cool  started  Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans    the turbocharger after the engine is shut off  Depending  mission cannot be started this way  Unburned fuel   on the type of driving and the amount of cargo  the pump  could enter the catalytic converter and once the   will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been    engine has started  ignite and damage the converter   shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger   and vehicle     ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at  a time  Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again        Although the pump is rubber mounted for quiet opera   tion  it is normal to hear it running during this time     212 STARTING AND OPERATING  MANUAL TRANSMISSION   IF EQUIPPED    WARNING     You or others could be injured if you leave the  vehicle unattended without having the parking       brake fully applied  The parking brake should  always be applied when the driver is not in the  vehicle  especially on an incline        8191bf86    Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears  As you  release the clutch pedal  lightly press the accelerator    pedal  Shift Pattern  Six Speed     Use each gear in numerical order  do not skip a gear  Be  sure the transmission is in first gear   not third   when  starting from a standing position  Damage to the clutch  ca
236. parking brake to  transmission into PARK and ensure that the vehicle will  allow the vehicle to cool not roll when in PARK   until    TRANS  COOL  READY TO DRIVE   If Equipped     is displayed                 226 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    Transmission Limp Home Mode    Transmission function is monitored electronically for  abnormal conditions  If a condition is detected that could  result in transmission damage  Transmission Limp Home  Mode is activated  In this mode  some gears will be  unavailable  The transmission will operate only in a  certain select set of gears  such as 1st  2nd  3rd  and  Reverse  or 1st  3rd  5th  and Reverse  or 2nd  4th  and 6th   with no Reverse    PARK and NEUTRAL will continue  to be available  The Malfunction Indicator Light  MIL   may be illuminated  Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle  to be driven to an authorized studio for service without  damaging the transmission     In the event of a momentary problem  the transmission  can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the  following steps     1  Stop the vehicle   2  Shift the transmission into PARK     Turn the engine OFF     3   4  Wait approximately 10 seconds   5  Restart the engine    6     Shift into the desired gear range  If the problem is no  longer detected  the transmission will return to normal  operation     NOTE  Even if the transmission can be reset  we recom   mend that you visit your authorized studio at your  earliest possible convenience  Your authorized studio
237. pen the hood until the radiator has had  time to cool  Never try to open a cooling system  pressure cap when the radiator is hot        Coolant Checks    Check engine coolant  antifreeze  protection every  12 months  before the onset of freezing weather  where  applicable   If the engine coolant  antifreeze  is dirty or  rusty in appearance  the system should be drained   flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant  anti   freeze   Check the front of the A C condenser for any  accumulation of bugs  leaves  etc  If dirty  clean by gently  spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the  face of the condenser     Cooling System   Drain  Flush  And Refill    If the engine coolant  antifreeze  is dirty or contains visible  sediment  clean and flush with OAT coolant  antifreeze   that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard  MS 12106     Refer to the    Maintenance Schedule    for the proper main   tenance intervals     a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333    Selection Of Coolant CAUTION   Continued     Refer to    Fluids  Lubricants  and Genuine Parts    in       Maintaining Your Vehicle    for further information     CAUTION       Mixing of engine coolant  antifreeze  other than  specified Organic Additive Technology  OAT  en   gine coolant  antifreeze   may result in engine  damage and may decrease corrosion protection     Organic Additive Technology  OAT  engine cool   ant is different and should not be mixed with  Hybrid Organic Additive Technology  HOAT  en  
238. r Determining Correct Load Limit    1  Locate the statement  The combined weight of occu   pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or  XXX kg  on your vehicle s placard     2  Determine the combined weight of the driver and  passengers that will be riding in your vehicle     3  Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas   sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg        252 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    4     The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE     cargo and luggage load capacity  For example  if     XXX    amount equals 1 400 lbs  635 kg  and there will  be five 150 lb  68 kg  passengers in your vehicle  the  amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity  is 650 lbs  295 kg   since 5 x 150   750  and 1400   750    650 lbs  295 kg         Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo    being loaded on the vehicle  That weight may not  safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load  capacity calculated in Step 4       If your vehicle will be towing a trailer  load from your    trailer will be transferred to your vehicle  Consult this  manual to determine how this reduces the available  cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle     The following table shows examples on how to calcu   late total load  cargo luggage  and towing capacities  of your vehicle with varying seating configurations  and number and size of occupants  This table is for  illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for  the seating and load carry capacity of 
239. r Group LLC     emark of Fiat Group Marketing  amp   on S p A   used under license by       Copyright    2013 Chrys    er Group LLC e    SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE       1          2                                                    10             INTRODUCTION  catestetetecsedeatasesen tp iende Saee ess Rida dd 3 HEN  THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE            00 000s cece eee eens 9 I  UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE    2 0 0 0  00sec eee ences 81 EJ  UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL       ien 151 4  STARTING AND OPERATING aua riada 205 mm  WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES    4 cre s de oi 281 m  MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE aerea eps bens y a rk RESIDE V OR p SERE RES 311  MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES cru eue s PR EUR reset o remate e des 363 E  IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE    46 pere kA REX RARE ERR e 371 9  INDEX                                    381 10           INTRODUCTION       CONTENTS  B INTRODUCTION                     000  4 M VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER          6  ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL                4 BM VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS     7    E WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS                6    4 INTRODUCTION IN    INTRODUCTION    Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle  Be assured  that it represents precision workmanship  distinctive styl   ing  and high quality   all essentials that are traditional to  our vehicles     This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis   tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint  you 
240. r lubrication or oil change  Replace as required     Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The  Vehicle    Seat Belts    Inspect the belt system periodically  checking for cuts   frays  and loose parts  Damaged parts must be replaced  immediately  Do not disassemble or modify the system     Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a  collision  Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after  a collision if they have been damaged  i e   bent retractor   torn webbing  etc    If there is any question regarding belt  or retractor condition  replace the belt     78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN    Air Bag Warning Light    The light should come on and remain on for four  to eight seconds as a bulb check when the  ignition switch is first turned ON  If the light is  not lit during starting  see your authorized stu   dio  If the light stays on  flickers  or comes on while  driving  have the system checked by an authorized studio     O   ry    Defroster    Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place  the blower control on high speed  You should be able to  feel the air directed against the windshield  See your  authorized studio for service if your defroster is inoper   able     Floor Mat Safety Information    Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your  vehicle  Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area  unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they  cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals  or impair 
241. r trim panel  There is a single switch on the front  passenger door  which operate the front passenger win   dow and a single switch on each rear door that operates  the rear passenger door window  The window controls  will operate only when the ignition switch is in the  ON RUN position                    A     Driver Front Window  Switch   B     Passenger Front Window  Switch   C     Window Lockout Switch    D     Driver Rear Window  Switch   E     Passenger Rear Window  Switch          a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25    NOTE  The power window switches will remain active AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection      for up to three minutes after the ignition switch is cycled If Equipped  to the OFF position  Opening either front door will cancel      Lift the window switch to the second detent  release  and  this feature  a     the window will go up automatically     WARNING  To stop the window from going all the way up during the    AUTO up operation  push down on the switch briefly   Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the    ignition switch  Occupants  particularly unattended o    the first detent and release it when you want the window  to stop     children  can become entrapped by the windows  while operating the power window switches  Such       entrapment may result in serious injury or death  NOTE    e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto   Auto Down closure  it will reverse direction and then go back  The window switches
242. r warranty folder   All work to be performed may not be covered by the  warranty  Discuss additional charges with the service  manager  Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle   s  service history  This can often provide a clue to the  current problem     Prepare A List    Make a written list of your vehicle   s problems or the  specific work you want done  If you   ve had an accident  or work done that is not on your maintenance log  let the  service advisor know     Be Reasonable With Requests    If you list a number of items and you must have your  vehicle by the end of the day  discuss the situation with  the service advisor and list the items in order of priority   At many authorized studio  you may obtain a rental  vehicle at a minimal daily charge  If you need a rental  it  is advisable to make these arrangements when you call  for an appointment     IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE    The manufacturer and its authorized studio are vitally  interested in your satisfaction  We want you to be happy  with our products and services     Warranty service must be done by an authorized studio   We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an  authorized studio  They know your vehicle the best  and    a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 373    are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality  service  The manufacturer   s authorized studio have the  facilities  factory trained technicians  special tools  and  the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed  correctly and i
243. rasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create  a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate     3  Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing   The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of  the latch plate     4  Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the  folded webbing     Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions    The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are  equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors  ALR   which are used to secure a child restraint system  For  additional information  refer to  Installing Child Re   straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt  under the  Child  Restraints  section  The chart below defines the type of    feature for each seating position                          Driver Center Passenger  First Row N A N A ALR  Second Row ALR ALR ALR            N A     Not Applicable    ALR     Automatic Locking Retractor    36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IE    If the passenger seating position is equipped with an  ALR and is being used for normal usage     Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably  wrap around the occupant   s mid section so as to not  activate the ALR  If the ALR is activated  you will hear a  ratcheting sound as the belt retracts  Allow the webbing  to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull  out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort   ably wrap around the occupant   s mid section  Slide the  latch plate into the buckle until you 
244. re Grades       NOTE     P  Passenger    Metric tire sizing is based on U S     design standards  P Metric tires have the letter  P   molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa   tion  Example  P215 65R15 95H     European Metric tire sizing is based on European  design standards  Tires designed to this standard have  the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with  the section width  The letter  P  is absent from this tire  size designation  Example  215 65R15 96H     LT  Light Truck    Metric tire sizing is based on U S   design standards  The size designation for LT Metric  tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the  letters  LT  that are molded into the sidewall preced   ing the size designation  Example  LT235 85R16     A STARTING AND OPERATING 245    e Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo  e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S  design  rary emergency use only  Temporary high pressure standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded  compact spare tires have the letter    T    or    S    molded into the sidewall  Example  31x10 5 R15 LT   into the sidewall preceding the size designation    Example  T145 80D18 103M     Tire Sizing Chart       EXAMPLE           Size Designation        P   Passenger car tire size based on U S  design standards         blank          Passenger car tire based on European design standards  LT   Light truck tire based on U S  design standards   Tor S   Temporary spare tire   31   Overall diam
245. reservoir     BRAKE    The light will remain on until the cause is corrected     If brake failure is indicated  immediate repair is necessary     WARNING     Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is    dangerous  You could have a collision  Have the  vehicle checked immediately        Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System   ABS   are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force  Distribution  EBD   In the event of an EBD failure  the  Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS  Light  Immediate repair to the ABS system is required     Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by  turning the ignition switch from the OFF LOCK position  to the ON RUN position  The light should illuminate for  approximately two seconds  The light should then turn    A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157    off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is  detected  If the light does not illuminate  have the light  inspected by an authorized studio     The light also will turn on when the parking brake is  applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi   tion     NOTE  This light shows only that the parking brake is  applied  It does not show the degree of brake application   7  Rear Defrost Light   This indicator will illuminate when the rear win     dow defroster is on  The rear window defroster  automatically turns off after 20 minutes     8  Low Fuel Light    When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gallon   7 6L  this light will tu
246. reset at zero     NOTE  If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic  Vehicle Information Center  EVIC  in the instrument  cluster  all warnings including    door    and    gate    and     Change Engine Oil    will only be displayed in the EVIC  display  For additional information  refer to    Electronic  Vehicle Information Center  EVIC         26  Fuel Door Reminder    The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door  is located on the right side of the vehicle        27  Electronic Throttle Control  ETC  Light     This light informs you of a problem with the  DA Electronic Throttle Control  ETC  system  If a  problem is detected  the light will come on  while the engine is running  Cycle the ignition  key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the  shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position  The light  should turn off  If the light remains lit with the engine  running  your vehicle will usually be drivable  however   see an authorized studio for service as soon as possible  If  the light is flashing when the engine is running  imme   diate service is required and you may experience reduced  performance  an elevated rough idle or engine stall and  your vehicle may require towing  The light will come on  when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain  on briefly as a bulb check  If the light does not come on  during starting  have the system checked by an autho   rized studio     UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165  28  Anti Lock Brake  ABS  L
247. restraint     74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    3  Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to  the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram        Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting  4  Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child  restraint manufacturer   s instructions     WARNING     e An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to  increased head motion and possible injury to the  child  Use only the anchorage position directly  behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top    tether strap    e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat   make sure the tether strap does not slip into the  opening between the seatbacks as you remove  slack in the strap        Transporting Pets    Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet   An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly  injured  or could injure a passenger during panic braking  or in a collision     Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses  or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75    ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS    A long break in period is not required for the engine and  drivetrain  transmission and axle  in your vehicle     Drive moderately during the first 300 miles  500 km    After the initial 60 miles  100 km   speeds up to 50 or  55 mph  80 or 90 km h  are desirable     While cruising  brief full throttle acceleration within the  limits of local traffic
248. rged battery  The resulting electrical spark  could cause the battery to explode and could result in  personal injury  If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle   you should have the battery and charging system in   spected at your authorized studio        Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster  battery  let the engine idle a few minutes  and then  start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged  battery  Once the engine is started  remove the jumper  cables in the reverse sequence       Disconnect the negative     jumper cable from the    negative cable     of the vehicle with the discharged  battery       Disconnect the negative end     of the jumper cable    from the negative     post of the booster battery     Disconnect the opposite end of the positive     jumper  cable from the positive     post of the booster battery       Disconnect the positive     end of the jumper cable    from the positive     post of the discharged vehicle        306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  HN   Lo  CcAUHON      REVERSE  with automatic transmission  or 2nd gear and  AUT     a REVERSE  with manual transmission   while gently press    Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets   ing the accelerator  Use the least amount of accelerator    draw power from the vehicle s battery  even when   pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion   not in use  i e   cellular phones  etc    Eventually  if   without spinning the wheels  or racing the engine    
249. ring Express Open operation  any movement  of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof       Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in  the ignition switch  Occupants  particularly unat   tended children  can become entrapped by the  power sunroof while operating the power sunroof  switch  Such entrapment may result in serious  injury or death      In a collision  there is greater risk of being thrown       from a vehicle with an open sunroof  You could   To Close    also be seriously injured or killed  Always fasten   With the sunroof in the full open position  pull and hold    your seat belt properly and make sure all passen    the power sunroof switch for approximately one second   gers are properly secured too     e Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof    NOTE  During Express close any movement of the  Never allow your fingers  other body parts  or any   SUnroof switch will stop the sunroof   object to project through the sunroof opening   Injury may result        140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM    Wind Buffeting    Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of  pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the  ears  Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the  windows down  or the sunroof  if equipped  in certain  open or partially open positions  This is a normal occur   rence and can be minimized  If the buffeting occurs with  the rear windows open  open the front and rear windows  together to minimize the buffe
250. ring an ABS stop to  provide regulated hydraulic pressure  The pump motor  makes a low humming noise during operation  which is  normal     The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light  When  the light is illuminated  the ABS is not functioning   The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes     A STARTING AND OPERATING 235    Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS WARNING   Continued     e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must    if the fault detected was only momentary     WARNING       Pumping the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their  effectiveness and may lead to a collision  Pumping    f E    makes the stopping distance longer  Just press When you are in a severe braking condition involving the  firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow      Se of the ABS  you will experience some pedal drop as  down or stop  the vehicle comes to a stop  This is the result of the EM   e The Anti Lock Brake System  ABS  cannot prevent   system reverting to the base brake system     the natural laws of physics from acting on the   Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a  vehicle  nor can it increase braking or steering   pulsing sensation  You may also hear a clicking noise   efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of   These occurrences are normal and indicate that the  the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded    system is functioning properly      The ABS cannot prevent collisions  including those  resulting from excessi
251. rn on  and remain on until fuel is  added     9  Fuel Gauge    When the ignition switch is in the ON  RUN position  the  digital scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the  fuel tank     NOTE  The fuel gauge and range will not immediately  update accurately when refueling with the engine on     10  Turn Signal Indicators     5    11  Temperature Gauge    The arrows will flash in unison with the exte   rior turn signal  when using the turn signal  lever     The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant tem   perature  Any reading within the normal range indicates  that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily     158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera   ture when driving in hot weather  or up mountain  grades  It should not be allowed to exceed the upper  limits of the normal operating range     CAUTION     Driving with a hot engine cooling system could  damage your vehicle  If all the segments of the  temperature gauge are lit  pull over and stop the    vehicle  Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner  turned off until the pointer drops back into the  normal range  If you hear continuous chimes  turn  the engine off immediately and call an authorized  dealer for service        WARNING     A hot engine cooling system is dangerous  You or  others could be badly burned by steam or boiling  coolant  You may want to call an authorized studio    for service if your vehicle overheats  If you d
252. rom contact  with oil  grease  and gasoline     Replacement Tires    The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many  characteristics  They should be inspected regularly for  wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure  The manu   facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva   lent to the originals in size  quality and performance  when replacement is needed  Refer to the paragraph on       Tread Wear Indicators     Refer to the Tire and Loading  Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for  the size designation of your tire  The Load Index and  Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original  equipment tire sidewall  See the Tire Sizing Chart ex   ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this  manual for more information relating to the Load Index  and Speed Symbol of a tire     It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two  rear tires as a pair  Replacing just one tire can seriously  affect your vehicle s handling  If you ever replace a  wheel  make sure that the wheel s specifications match  those of the original wheels     It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or  original equipment dealer with any questions you may  have on tire specifications or capability  Failure to use  equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the  safety  handling  and ride of your vehicle     A STARTING AND OPERATING 263    WARNING  WARNING   Continued       Do not use a tire  wheel size or rating other than  th
253. rom the valve stem   reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from  12 Volt outlet     3  Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the  vehicle     4  Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the  earliest opportunity at an authorized studio or tire  service center     a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293    5     Replace the Sealant Bottle  1  and Sealant Hose  6  4  Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous     assembly at your authorized studio as soon as pos   sible  Refer to   F  Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace   ment      NOTE  When having the tire serviced  advise the autho   rized studio or service center that the tire has been sealed  using the TIREFIT service kit      F  Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement     1  2     Uncoil the Sealant Hose  6   clear in color      Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the  recessed area under the sealant bottle       Press the Sealant Bottle release button  The Sealant    Bottle  1  will pop up  Remove the bottle and dispose  of it accordingly     5     ing     Position the new Sealant Bottle  1  in the housing so  that the Sealant Hose  6  aligns with the hose slot in  the front of the housing  Press the bottle into the  housing  An audible click will be heard indicating the  bottle is locked into place       Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end    of the Sealant Hose  6  and return the hose to its  storage area  located on the bottom of the air pump        Return 
254. roximately  one second  to go back to the main screen without  storing the settings        Exit Menu  This function closes the initial menu screen     Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the main  screen     Press the AA button to return to the first menu option   Speed Beep      Press the V button to return to the last menu option   Daylights     Uconnect   RADIOS   For detailed information about your Uconnect   radio   refer to your Uconnect   supplement Manual   iPod   USB SD CARD MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL    This feature allows an iPod   or external USB device to be  plugged into the USB port or an SD Card  6 5 Only  to  be plugged into the SD Card slot    UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181       1     SD Card Slot  6 5 Only   2     USB Connector  3     AUX Cable Jack       Refer to the Uconnect   5 0 6 5 User s Manual for iPod     external USB or SD Card device support capability     182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS    The remote sound system controls are located on the rear  surface of the steering wheel  Reach behind the wheel to  access the switches        045033001    Remote Sound System Controls  Back View Of Steering  Wheel     The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a  pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and  mode of the sound system  Pressing the top of the rocker  switch will increase the volume  and pressing the bottom  of the rocker switch will decrease the volume     Pressing the cent
255. s active        136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM    Troubleshooting Tips    If you are having trouble programming HomeLink     here are some of the most common solutions     e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit   ter     e     Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener   to complete the training for a Rolling Code      Did you unplug the device for programming and  remember to plug it back in    If you have any problems  or require assistance  please    call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or  on the Internet at  www HomeLink com for information or assistance     WARNING       Your motorized door or gate will open and close   while you are programming the universal trans   ceiver  Do not program the transceiver if people   pets or other objects are in the path of the door or  gate  Only use this transceiver with a garage door  opener that has a  stop and reverse  feature as  required by Federal safety standards  This includes  most garage door opener models manufactured  after 1982  Do not use a garage door opener without  these safety features  Call toll free 1 800 355 3515  or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for  safety information or assistance   Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide  a dan   gerous gas  Do not run your vehicle in the garage  while programming the transceiver  Exhaust gas  can cause serious injury or death        Aaa UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137  General Information NOTE     This device complies 
256. s it to the actual path of the vehicle   When the actual path does not match the intended path   ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist  in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition       Oversteer   when the vehicle is turning more than  appropriate for the steering wheel position     e Understeer   when the vehicle is turning less than  appropriate for the steering wheel position        240 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    WARNING     The Electronic Stability Control  ESC  cannot pre   vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the  vehicle  nor can it increase the traction afforded by  prevailing road conditions  ESC cannot prevent all  accidents  including those resulting from excessive  speed in turns  driving on very slippery surfaces  or  hydroplaning  ESC also cannot prevent collisions  resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro   priate driver input for the conditions  Only a safe   attentive  and skillful driver can prevent accidents   The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must  never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner  which could jeopardize the user   s safety or the safety  of others        ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And  ESC OFF Indicator Light    The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator  ESC Light in the instrument cluster will come on  when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR   ACC ON RUN  position for four seconds  If  the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes  on contin
257. s not the responsibility of the  manufacturer        NOTE  Intentional tampering with the emissions con   trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed  against you     Carbon Monoxide Warnings    WARNING     Carbon monoxide  CO  in exhaust gases is deadly   Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon  monoxide poisoning      Do not inhale exhaust gases  They contain carbon    monoxide  a colorless and odorless gas  which can  kill  Never run the engine in a closed area  such as  a garage  and never sit in a parked vehicle with the  engine running for an extended period  If the  vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine        Continued     276 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    WARNING   Continued     running for more than a short period  adjust the  ventilation system to force fresh  outside air into  the vehicle       Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main   tenance  Have the exhaust system inspected every  time the vehicle is raised  Have any abnormal  conditions repaired promptly  Until repaired  drive  with all side windows fully open     ADDING FUEL  1  Open the fuel filler door     2  There is no fuel filler cap  A flapper door inside the  pipe seals the system        3  Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe   the  nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel   ing    NOTE  Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches   allowing the flapper door to open     4  Fill the vehicle with fuel     when the fuel nozzle   clicks  
258. safe operation of your vehicle in other ways     WARNING     Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of  vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per     sonal injury   e Always make sure that floor mats are properly  attached to the floor mat fasteners         Continued     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79    WARNING   Continued  WARNING   Continued     e Never place or install floor mats or other floor e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the  coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly driver footwell while the vehicle is moving  Objects  secured to prevent them from moving and interfer  can become trapped under the brake pedal and  ing with the pedals or the ability to control the accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control   vehicle  e If required  mounting posts must be properly in       Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top stalled  if not equipped from the factory   of already installed floor mats  Additional floor Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or  mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the mounting can cause interference with the brake  pedal area and interfere with the pedals  pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of    Check mounting of mats on a regular basis  Always control of the vehicle   properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have  been removed for cleaning         Continued     80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    Periodic Sa
259. set speed     To Activate    Push the ON OFF button  The Cruise Indicator Light in  the instrument cluster will illuminate  To turn the system  off  push the ON OFF button a second time  The Cruise  Indicator Light will turn off  The system should be  turned off when not in use     WARNING     Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on  when not in use is dangerous  You could accidentally    set the system or cause it to go faster than you want   You could lose control and have an accident  Always  leave the system OFF when you are not using it        To Set A Desired Speed    Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON  When the vehicle  has reached the desired speed  press the SET     button  and release  Release the accelerator and the vehicle will  operate at the selected speed     NOTE  The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed  and on level ground before pressing the SET button     a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119    To Deactivate    A soft tap on the brake pedal  pushing the CANC button   or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will  deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set  speed memory  Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the  ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory     To Resume Speed    To resume a previously set speed  push the RES      button and release  Resume can be used at any speed  above 25 mph  40 km h      To Vary The Speed Setting    When the Electronic Speed Control is set  you can in   crease
260. side impact sensors that are cali   brated to deploy the Seat Mounted Side Air Bags  SAB   and SABIC during impacts that require air bag occupant  protection     WARNING     e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right  SABIC  do not stack luggage or other cargo up high  enough to block the location of the SABIC  The  area where the side curtain air bag is located    should remain free from any obstructions      Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects  between you and the SAB  the performance could  be adversely affected and or objects could be  pushed into you  causing serious injury         Continued     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45    WARNING   Continued       Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags  do  not have any accessory items installed which will  alter the roof  including adding a sunroof to your    vehicle  Do not add roof racks that require perma   nent attachments  bolts or screws  for installation  on the vehicle roof  Do not drill into the roof of the  vehicle for any reason        Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag       The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides  enhanced protection and works together with the Driver  Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact  Knee Impact Bolster    Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag    The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the  front passenger  and position the front occupant for the  best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag     46 THINGS TO KNOW B
261. ss the MENU button to store the new setting  and go back to the previously selected submenu option     Press and hold the MENU button to return to the main  menu  short hold  or the main screen  longer hold      Change Engine Oil Indicator System    Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change  indicator system  The    Change Engine Oil    message will  flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds  after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next    UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169    scheduled oil change interval  The engine oil change  indicator system is duty cycle based  which means the  engine oil change interval may fluctuate  dependent  upon your personal driving style     Unless reset  this message will continue to display each  time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN  position  To turn off the message temporarily  press and  release the MENU button  To reset the oil change indica   tor system  after performing the scheduled maintenance    refer to the following procedure     1  Turn the ignition switch to the ON position   Do not  start the engine      2  Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly  three times  within 10 seconds     3  Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position        170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    NOTE  If the indicator message illuminates when you  start the vehicle  the oil change indicator system did not  reset  If necessary  repeat this procedure     Trip Computer    The Trip Computer is 
262. ssion in REVERSE or first gear     The parking brake lever is located in the center console   To apply the parking brake  pull the lever up as firmly as  possible  To release the parking brake  pull the lever up  slightly  press the side button with your thumb  then  lower the lever completely           A    1     Parking Brake Release Button  2     Parking Brake Lever       When the parking brake is applied with the ignition  switch in the MAR  ACC ON RUN  position  the Brake  Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate     A STARTING AND OPERATING 233    When parking on a hill  it is important to turn the front  wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away  from the curb on an uphill grade  The parking brake  should always be applied whenever the driver is not in  the vehicle     WARNING     e Never leave children alone in a vehicle  or with  access to an unlocked vehicle     Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is    dangerous for a number of reasons  A child or  others could be seriously or fatally injured  Chil   dren should be warned not to touch the parking  brake  brake pedal or the shift lever         Continued     WARNING   Continued       Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle  or  in a location accessible to children   A child could  operate power windows  other controls  or move  the vehicle    Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged  before driving  failure to do so can lead to brake    failure and a collision    Alwa
263. ssure Bottle  3     Brake Fluid Reservoir 6     Washer Fluid Reservoir 9     Oil Fill Cap    314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM     OBD Il    Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard  diagnostic system called OBD IL This system monitors  the performance of the emissions  engine  and automatic  transmission control systems  When these systems are  operating properly  your vehicle will provide excellent  performance and fuel economy  as well as engine emis   sions well within current government regulations     If any of these systems require service  the OBD II system  will turn on the    Malfunction Indicator Light  MIL       It will also store diagnostic codes and other information  to assist your service technician in making repairs  Al   though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not  need towing  see your authorized studio for service as  soon as possible     CAUTION       Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause  further damage to the emission control system  lt  could also affect fuel economy and drivability  The    vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests  can be performed    e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running   severe catalytic converter damage and power loss  will soon occur  Immediate service is required        REPLACEMENT PARTS    Use of genuine parts for normal scheduled maintenance  and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de   signed performance  Damage or failures caused by the
264. steel  wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses     Glass Surfaces    All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with  MOPARO Glass Cleaner  or any commercial household   type glass cleaner  Never use an abrasive type cleaner  Use  caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped  with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window  equipped with the radio antenna  Do not use scrapers or  other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements     When cleaning the rear view mirror  spray cleaner on  the towel or rag that you are using  Do not spray cleaner  directly on the mirror     Instrument Panel Cover    The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which  minimizes reflections on the windshield  Do not use  protectants or other products which may cause undesir   able reflections  Use soap and warm water to restore the  low glare surface        348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    Instrument Panel Bezels    CAUTION     When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve   hicle  read the installation instructions carefully     Some air fresheners will damage the finish of  painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly  contact any surface        Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses    The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are  molded in clear plastic  When cleaning the lenses  care  must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic    1  Clean with a wet soft rag  A mild soap solution may  be used  but do not use
265. sults in the best BAS assistance  To receive the  benefit of the system  you must apply continuous brak   ing pressure during the stopping sequence  do not     pump    the brakes   Do not reduce brake pedal pressure  unless braking is no longer desired  Once the brake pedal  is released  the BAS is deactivated     A STARTING AND OPERATING 237    WARNING       The Brake Assist System  BAS  cannot prevent the  natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle   nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail   ing road conditions    The BAS cannot prevent collisions  including those    resulting from excessive speed in turns  driving on  very slippery surfaces  or hydroplaning    The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must  never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or  the safety of others        Traction Control System  TCS     This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of  the driven wheels  If wheel spin is detected  brake  pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s  and engine  power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and  stability  A feature of the TCS system functions similar to  a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin  across a driven axle  If one wheel on a driven axle is  spinning faster than the other  the system will apply the  brake of the spinning wheel  This will allow more engine  torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning   This feature remains active
266. t  Brown  9 F93 75 Amp   Right Fog Light  Brown  10 F33 5 Amp BSM  ESP  Tan  11 F34 20 Amp   Rear Left Passenger  Yellow Window  12 F49 20 Amp   Rear Right Passen   Yellow   ger Window          VEHICLE STORAGE    If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than  21 days  you may want to take these steps to protect your  battery     e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery     e Anytime you store your vehicle  or keep it out of  service  i e   vacation  for two weeks or more  run the  air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes  in the fresh air and high blower setting  This will  ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the  possibility of compressor damage when the system is  started again        356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    REPLACEMENT BULBS    Interior Bulbs    Bulb Number       Bulb Number                               Overhead Lamp CSW  Sun Visors CSW  Courtesy Lamp W5W  Glove Compartment C5W  Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W          Exterior Bulbs             Bulb Number                   Front Low and High HIR2LL  Beam Headlamp  Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W                   Front Parking Daytime W21 5W  Running Lamps  Front Side Marker Lamps LED    See Authorized studio   Rear Tail Stop Lamps P21 5W  Rear Tail Lamp LED    See Authorized studio   Rear Turn Signal Lamps P21W  Rear Backup Lamps W16W  Rear Side Marker Lamps LED    See Authorized studio   Center High Mounted LED  Stop Lamp  See Authorized studio   Front Fog Lamps H11          a 
267. t an authorized studio to have all the keys  programmed     22  Malfunction Indicator Light  MIL    LS  The Malfunction Indicator Light  MIL  is part of  an onboard diagnostic system  called OBDII    that monitors engine and automatic transmission   control systems  The light will illuminate when the key is    in the ON RUN position before engine start  If the bulb  does not come on when turning the key from OFF LOCK  to ON RUN  have the condition checked promptly     Certain conditions  such as poor fuel quality  etc   may  illuminate the MIL after engine start  The vehicle should  be serviced if the light stays on through several of your  typical driving cycles  In most situations  the vehicle will  drive normally and will not require towing     CAUTION     Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator  Light  MIL  on could cause damage to the engine    control system  It also could affect fuel economy and  drivability  If the MIL is flashing  severe catalytic  converter damage and power loss will soon occur   Immediate service is required        162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    WARNING     A malfunctioning catalytic converter  as referenced  above  can reach higher temperatures than in normal    operating conditions  This can cause a fire if you drive  slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry  plants  wood  cardboard  etc  This could result in death  or serious injury to the driver  occupants or others        23  Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltal
268. tarting Procedure                   E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE                306  M SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE                  308       282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN  ll TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE             309 W CAP LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL              310       Automatic Transmission              00  310                Manual Transmissi0N                    310       a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283    HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS    The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the  instrument panel below the radio     Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning   flashers  When the switch is activated  all direc   tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming  traffic of an emergency  Press the switch a second time to  turn off the Hazard Warning flashers     Do not use this emergency warning system when the  vehicle is in motion  Use it when your vehicle is disabled  and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists     If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service  the  Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with  the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked     NOTE  With extended use  the Hazard Warning flashers  may wear down your battery     IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS    In any of the following situations  you can reduce the  potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action       On the highways     slow down     e In city traffic     while stopped  place the transmission  in NEUTRAL  but do not increase engine idle sp
269. ted with  the ownership experience  You will be pleased with their  sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related  concerns     WARNING     Engine exhaust  some of its constituents  and certain  vehicle components contain  or emit  chemicals  known to the State of California to cause cancer and    birth defects  or other reproductive harm  In addi   tion  certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain  products of component wear contain  or emit  chemi   cals known to the State of California to cause cancer  and birth defects  or other reproductive harm        WARRANTY INFORMATION    See the Warranty Information Booklet  located on the DVD   for the terms and provisions of FIAT Group Automobiles  warranties applicable to this vehicle and market     REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS    In The 50 United States And Washington  D C     If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could  cause a crash or cause injury or death  you should  immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety  Administration  NHTSA  in addition to notifying the  manufacturer     If NHTSA receives similar complaints  it may open an  investigation  and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  a group of vehicles  it may order a recall and remedy  campaign  However  NHTSA cannot become involved  in individual problems between you  your authorized  studio  and the manufacturer        376 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN    To contact NHTSA  you may either call the Auto Safety  Hotline 
270. ter only when the engine is operating        Storage Bin And Cargo Hook    148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM    CAUTION  ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED    The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the    weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack  The  the heating elements      D  load must not exceed 110 Ibs  50 kg   and should be    Use care when washing the inside of the rear uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars   window  Do not use abrasive window cleaners on  the interior surface of the window  Use a soft cloth   Their are two attachment points inside the door jambs  and a mild washing solution  wiping parallel to the   that the Roof Rack crossbars attach to   heating elements  Labels can be peeled off after  soaking with warm water     Do not use scrapers  sharp instruments  or abrasive  window cleaners on the interior surface of the  window     Keep all objects a safe distance from the window     Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to          Ss       Roof Rack Attachment Points       UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149    Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars   The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying  capacity of the vehicle  Be sure the total load of cargo  inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not  exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity     WARNING     Cargo must be securely tied before driving your  vehicle  Improperly secured loads can fly 
271. ter sig   nals to time out  or quit  after several seconds of trans   mission     which may not be long enough for HomeLink    to pick up the signal during programming  Similar to this  Canadian law  some U S  gate operators are designed to  time out in the same manner     It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling  process to prevent possible overheating of the garage  door or gate motor     1  Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position     2  Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in  3 to 8 cm   away from the HomeLink   button you wish to program  while keeping the HomeLink   indicator light in view     3  Continue to press and hold the HomeLink   button   while you press and release     cycle      your hand held  transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink   has  successfully accepted the frequency signal  The indi   cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when  fully trained     4  Watch for the HomeLink   indicator to change flash  rates  When it changes  it is programmed  It may take  up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases  The garage  door may open and close while you are programming     5  Press and hold the programmed HomeLink   button  and observe the indicator light    e If the indicator light stays on constantly  program   ming is complete and the garage door device should  activate when the HomeLink   button is pressed      To program the two remaining HomeLink   buttons   repeat each step for each remaining button  DO NOT  erase the chan
272. ter with an integrated key  To use the mechanical  key simply press the mechanical key release button        020274421    Mechanical Key Release Button    The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key  code numbers to order duplicate keys  and the autho   rized studio that sold you your new vehicle has the key  code numbers for your vehicle locks  These numbers can  be used to order duplicate keys     Ignition Switch   The ignition switch can be turned to three different  positions    e STOP  engine off  key can be removed  Some electrical    devices  e g  sound system  central door locking system   etc   can operate     e AVV  engine start up     MAR  driving position  All electrical devices are enabled     The ignition switch is fitted with a safety system that  requires the ignition key to be turned back to STOP if the  engine does not start  before the starting operation can be  repeated              1     STOP  OFF LOCK  3     AVV  START   2     MAR  ACC ON RUN     THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13  SENTRY KEYO    The Sentry Key   Immobilizer System prevents unau   thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine  The  system does not need to be armed or activated  Operation  is automatic  regardless of whether the vehicle is locked  or unlocked     The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded  electronic chip  transponder  to prevent unauthorized  vehicle operation  Therefore  only keys that are pro   grammed to the vehicle can be used t
273. the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the    vehicle     294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN    JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING     IF EQUIPPED    WARNING       Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the  vehicle close to moving traffic  Pull far enough off  the road to avoid the danger of being hit when  operating the jack or changing the wheel      Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous  The    vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you  You  could be crushed  Never put any part of your body  under a vehicle that is on a jack  If you need to get  under a raised vehicle  take it to a service center  where it can be raised on a lift    e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is  on a jack      Continued        WARNING   Continued       The jack is designed to be used as a tool for  changing tires only  The jack should not be used to    lift the vehicle for service purposes  The vehicle  should be jacked on a firm level surface only   Avoid ice or slippery areas        Jack Location    The spare tire jack and TIREFIT are both located in the  rear cargo area underneath the cargo floor     WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295       Spare Tire Removal          1  Tow Eye  2  Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel Spare Tire Location  3  Jack The spare tire is stowed in underneath the rear cargo area    4  Jack Handle   5  Tirefit Kit   6  Emergency Flashlight  7  Emergency Screwdriver    on the outside of the car        296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES  1  Remove the cargo flo
274. tial vehicle dam   age     for example  some pole collisions  truck underrides   and angle offset collisions  On the other hand  depending  on the type and location of impact  Advanced Front Air  Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end  damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47    The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions   Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and  type of collision     Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration  over time  vehicle speed and damage by themselves are  not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should  have deployed     Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli   sions  and also are needed to help keep you in position   away from an inflating air bag     The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of  the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the  ON RUN or START position  If the key is in the OFF   LOCK position  or not in the ignition  the air bag system  is not on and the air bags will not inflate     The ORC contains a backup power supply system that  may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or  it becomes disconnected prior to deployment     e  Also  the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning  ry Light in the instrument panel for approxi   mately four to eight seconds for a self check  when the ignition is first turned on  After the  self check  the Air Bag Warning L
275. ting  If the buffeting occurs  with the sunroof open  adjust the sunroof opening to  minimize the buffeting or open any window     Power Sun Blind    Pull the power sun blind switch and the blind will move  towards the rear part of the car  until it is fully open     With the blind fully open pull the power sun blind switch  and the blind will move towards the front part of the car   until it is fully closed     NOTE  During the automatic opening and closing  stages  if the power sun blind switch is pulled again it  will stop the blind movement     POWER OUTLETS  Passenger compartment power socket    The power outlet is located on the central tunnel  in front  of the shift lever  between the two cupholders  It only  operates with the ignition key at MAR ON     a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141    On models with optional  smoker   s kit     the cigar lighter Luggage compartment power socket    takes the place of the power socket  see  Cigar lighter  This is located on the left side of the luggage compartment     paragraph   It only operates with the ignition key at MAR ON     DE    Passenger compartment power socket        Luggage compartment power socket  NOTE  Do not connect devices with power higher than  180 W to the socket  Do not damage the socket by using  unsuitable adaptors        142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM  CIGAR LIGHTER     IF EQUIPPED NOTE     This is located on the central tunnel  next to the hand     Always check that the cig
276. tions to any part of the air bag system    could cause it to fail when you need it  You could  Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot be injured if the air bag system is not there to  protect you in another collision  Have the air bags  protect you  Do not modify the components or  seat belt pretensioners  and the front seat belt retrac  wiring  including adding any kind of badges or  tor assemblies replaced by an authorized studio stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the       immediately  Also  have the Occupant Restraint Con  upper right side of the instrument panel  Do not   troller  ORC  system serviced as well  modify the front bumper  vehicle body structure  or  add aftermarket side steps or running boards    e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air   bag system yourself  Be sure to tell anyone who   works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system      Continued     a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55    WARNING   Continued  Air Bag Warning Light      Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag e You will want to have the air bags ready to    system  The air bag may inflate accidentally or may  Y  not function properly if modifications are made   Take your vehicle to an authorized studio for any  air bag system service  If your seat  including your    V inflate for your protection in a collision  The 2    Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal  circuits and interconnecting wiring associated  with air b
277. toll free at 1 888 327 4236  ITY  1 800 424     9153   or go to http   www safercargov  or write to   Administrator  NHTSA  1200 New Jersey Avenue  SE    West Building  Washington  D C  20590  You can also  obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  http     www safercar gov     In Canada    If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect  you  should contact the Customer Service Department imme   diately  Canadian customers who wish to report a safety  defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans   port Canada  Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and  Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http     www tc gc ca   roadsafety      PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS    To order the following manuals  you may use either the  website or the phone numbers listed below  Visa  Master   card  American Express  and Discover orders are accepted   If you prefer mailing your payment  please call for an order  form     NOTE  A street address is required when ordering  manuals  no P O  Boxes      Service Manuals    These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor   mation that students and professional technicians need in  diagnosing  troubleshooting  problem solving  maintain   ing  servicing  and repairing FIAT Group Automobiles  vehicles  A complete working knowledge of the vehicle   system  and or components is written in straightforward  language with illustrations  diagrams  and charts     a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 377    Diagnostic Procedure Manuals    Dia
278. tom of  the Uconnect   display     2  Press the    Settings    soft key     3  Press the    Safety  amp  Driving Assistance    soft key     4  Press the    Parkview Backup camera    soft key to turn  the ParkView   system ON or OFF     NOTE  A check mark will appear in the selection box to  indicate the system is turned ON     Turning Camera Delay On Or Off    When you are in the    Safety  amp  Assistance    screen there is  an option to turn the Camera Delay on or off     Press the check box soft key next to    Camera Delay    to  enable disable  The default is checked at every key On  cycle     NOTE  A clear  X  exit button will be placed in the  bottom left corner while the user is in Drive and camera  delay is active     a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129    When the camera delay is active  and the vehicle is  shifted into Drive  the camera images will remain on  the screen for 10 seconds  the vehicle reaches 8 mph   13 km h   or until the    X    is pressed  The user is then  taken back to their last Radio state  If camera delay is off   the user will be taken directly to their last Radio state  once in Drive  When the vehicle is in Drive and the  vehicle speed reaches between 9 mph  15 km h  to  11 mph  18 km h  the camera images will remain on the  screen overlapping the text  Max speed reached    being  displayed     GARAGE DOOR OPENER     IF EQUIPPED    HomeLink   replaces up to three remote controls  hand   held transmitters  that operate devices such
279. ton on the shift  lever     Six Speed Automatic Transmission    The shift lever position display  located in the instrument  panel cluster  indicates the transmission gear range  You  must press the brake pedal and the shifter release button  on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of the PARK  position  refer to    Brake Transmission Shift Interlock  System    in this section   To drive  press the button on  the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever  from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position  The  electronically controlled transmission provides a precise  shift schedule  The transmission electronics are self   calibrating  therefore  the first few shifts on a new vehicle  may be somewhat abrupt  This is a normal condition  and  precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles   kilometers      A STARTING AND OPERATING 217    This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting  from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE  if  vehicle speed is above 6 mph  10 km h   This safety  feature helps protect your transmission from damage   Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be  done only when the accelerator pedal is released and the  vehicle is stopped  Be sure to keep your foot on the brake  pedal when shifting between these gears     The transmission shift lever has PARK  REVERSE  NEU   TRAL  DRIVE  and AutoStick   shift positions  Manual  shifts can be made using the AutoStick   shift control   refer to    AutoStick      in    Starting And Op
280. toring Telltale Light will illumi   nate in the instrument cluster  an audible chime will be  activated  and the    Check left or right front rear tire     text message will display when one or more of the four  active road tire pressures are low  Should this occur  you  should stop as soon as possible  check the inflation  pressure of each tire on your vehicle  and inflate each tire  to the vehicle   s recommended cold placard pressure  value  The system will automatically update and the Tire  Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the up   dated tire pressures have been received  The vehicle may  need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph   24 km h  to receive this information     Check TPMS Warnings    The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on  and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system  fault is detected  an audible chime will be activated and  the    Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable    text message  will display  If the ignition key is cycled  this sequence  will repeat providing the system fault still exists  The Tire  Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the  fault condition no longer exists  A system fault can occur  with any of the following scenarios     1  Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to  facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the  TPM sensors     2  Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting  that affects radio wave signals     3  Snow or ice around the whee
281. tton once will unlock all doors  The LED  will switch off once the doors are unlocked    e LED OFF  doors unlocked  Pressing the central  LOCK UNLOCK button once will lock all doors  The  LED will switch on once the doors are locked                EJE    x7    Central LOCK UNLOCK Button    Once the doors have been locked with the RKE transmit   ter  it will no longer be possible to unlock them by  pressing central LOCK UNLOCK button        THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21    NOTE  With central locking active  LED ON   opening  one of the front doors  it is possible to perform a central  unlocking  LED OFF   With central locking active  LED  ON   in order to open one of the rear passenger doors  it  is necessary pulling the internal door handle twice  With  one of the rear door open  LED OFF   the unlocking is  performed only for that door  not for all the vehicle     To unlock the front doors  pull the inside door handle to  the first detent  If the rear doors are locked  you must pull  the door handle once to unlock the door and pull the  door handle a second time to open the door     WARNING       Do not leave children or animals inside parked    vehicles in hot weather  Interior heat build up may  cause serious injury or death         Continued        22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In    WARNING   Continued  WARNING   Continued     e For personal security and safety in the event of an e Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle  or in  c
282. uctural member of the body located behind the  front door           Cold Tire Inflation Pressure   Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has  not been driven for at least 3 hours  or driven less than 1 mile  1 6 km  after  sitting for a three hour period  Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI   pounds per square inch  or kPa  kilopascals            Maximum Inflation Pressure   The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire infla   tion pressure for this tire  The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the          sidewall   Recommended Cold Tire Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on  Inflation Pressure the tire placard   Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle   s    loading capacity  the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold  tire inflation pressures                 250 STARTING AND OPERATING  Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard       Tire And Loading Information Placard Location    NOTE  The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on  the driver   s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver   s  side door        SEATING CAPACITY   TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3    THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD  NEVER EXCEED XXX KG  QR XXX BS     TIRE J REAR SPARE  ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE     PI95 70RTA P195 70R14 T125 70D15    COLD TIRE E       29PSI  SEE OWNER S MANUAL 
283. udio  at the start of each warm season  This service should  include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance  test  Drive belt tension should also be checked at this  time     CAUTION     Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning    system as the chemicals can damage your air condi   tioning components  Such damage is not covered by  the New Vehicle Limited Warranty           322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE INN    WARNING  Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling    R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro   carbon  HFC  that is endorsed by the Environmental  Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product  How   ever  the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning  service be performed by authorized studio or other  service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment       Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants  approved by the manufacturer for your air condi   tioning system  Some unapproved refrigerants are  flammable and can explode  injuring you  Other  unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the  system to fail  requiring costly repairs  Refer to    Warranty Information Book  located on the DVD    NOTE  Use only manufacturer approved A C system  for further warranty information  sealers  stop leak products  seal conditioners  compressor  The air conditioning system contains refrigerant   Oil  and refrigerants    under high pressure  To avoid risk of personal   injury or damage to the system  adding refrigerant   or any r
284. uired     330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN    WARNING  CAUTION     e Exhaust gases can injure or kill  They contain  carbon monoxide  CO   which is colorless and  odorless  Breathing it can make you unconscious  and can eventually poison you  To avoid breathing  CO  refer to    Safety Tips Exhaust Gas    in    Things  To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle    for further    information      A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park  over materials that can burn  Such materials might  be grass or leaves coming into contact with your  exhaust system  Do not park or operate your ve   hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con   tact anything that can burn       The catalytic converter requires the use of un   leaded fuel only  Leaded gasoline will destroy the  effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control  device and may seriously reduce engine perfor   mance and cause serious damage to the engine   Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your  vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition   In the event of engine malfunction  particularly  involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of  performance  have your vehicle serviced promptly   Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe  malfunction could cause the converter to overheat   resulting in possible damage to the converter and  vehicle        a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331    Under normal operating conditions  the catalytic con   verter will not require maintenance  However  it is im
285. uously with the engine running  a malfunction  has been detected in the ESC system  If this light remains  on after several ignition cycles  and the vehicle has been  driven several miles  kilometers  at speeds greater than  30 mph  48 km h   see your authorized studio as soon as  possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected     The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light  located  in the instrument cluster  starts to flash as soon as the  tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active     A STARTING AND OPERATING 241    The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also  flashes when TCS is active  If the ESC Activation   Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel   eration  ease up on the accelerator and apply as little  throttle as possible  Be sure to adapt your speed and  driving to the prevailing road conditions     NOTE     e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and  the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily  each time the ignition switch is turned ON     e Each time the ignition is turned ON  the ESC system  will be ON even if it was turned off previously     ESC The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the  OFF Electronic Stability Control  ESC  is off     ESC Operating Modes  The ESC system has two available operating modes   Full On    This is the normal operating mode for ESC  Whenever  the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode  This  mode should be used for most driving situations  ESC  should only be tur
286. ur vehicle could move and injure you and others  if it is not completely in PARK  Check by trying to  move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake  pedal released  Make sure the transmission is in  PARK before leaving the vehicle         Continued     WARNING   Continued     e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL   if the engine speed is higher than idle speed  If  your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal  the  vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re   verse  You could lose control of the vehicle and hit  someone or something  Only shift into gear when  the engine is idling normally and your foot is  firmly pressing the brake pedal   Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure  those in or near the vehicle  As with all vehicles   you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is  running  Before exiting a vehicle  always apply the  parking brake  shift the transmission into PARK   and remove the ignition key  Once the key is  removed  the shift lever is locked in PARK  secur   ing the vehicle against unwanted movement         Continued     A STARTING AND OPERATING 219    WARNING   Continued  CAUTION       When leaving the vehicle  always remove the igni      e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK  you  tion key and lock your vehicle  must cycle the ignition switch from the OFF posi   e Never leave children alone in a vehicle  or with tion to the ON RUN position  and also press the  access to an unlocked vehicle  Allowing children  to b
287. uring completely automatic operation  AUTO   varying  the air flow and or distribution  which are not dis   played  causes the AUTO function LED to disappear and  the system to operate in MANUAL mode  displaying  both the flow and distribution requested      When the compressor is deactivated  the AUTO operation  remains active only if the system can guarantee in car  comfort  Otherwise  the system switches to MANUAL  mode  the set temperatures will flash on the display   The  fan speed is the same in all the zones of the passenger  compartment     Adjusting The Air Temperature    Rotate the Driver Temperature Control  or the Passenger  Temperature Control  dial clockwise or anti clockwise   to adjust the air temperature in the front left  Driver  Temperature Control  or right  Passenger Temperature  Control  zone of the passenger compartment     The set temperatures are shown on the displays     Press the SYNC button to align the air temperature  between the two zones     19 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE    Turn the Passenger Temperature Control knob to return  to the separate management of air temperatures in the  two zones     Turning the control knobs completely in one direction or  the other activates the  HI   maximum heating  or  LO    maximum cooling  functions respectively     To deactivate these functions  turn the temperature knob  to the desired temperature     Air Distribution Selection   By pressing the Mode Control buttons  Up  Down Right  arrows   it 
288. ury or death     e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat  belts and while the vehicle is parked  Serious  injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted  seat belt     Reclining Rear Seats    The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat  cushion  To adjust the seatback  lift upward on the  handle  lean back on the seatback and when you reach  the desired position  release the handle        Rear Seat Recliner Handle       98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE    WARNING  1  Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper    outboard side of the seat        Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the    shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest   In a collision you could slide under the seat belt   which could result in serious injury or death        Fold And Tumble Rear Seat  NOTE     e Prior to folding the rear seat  it may be necessary to  reposition the front seats          Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and  positioned forward  This will allow the rear seat to fold  down easily     Seatback Release Lever    a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99  2  Fold the seatback forward  3  Locate the seatback recline lever on the outboard side    75  gt   of the seat and lift upward on the lever     Seatback Folded       Seatback Recline Lever       100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  4  Slowly flip the entire seat forward  Rear Armrest     If equipped    To use the armrest  lower it d
289. ve speed in turns  following  another vehicle too closely  or hydroplaning     never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  manner  which could jeopardize the user s safety or  the safety of others         Continued     236 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM    Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic  brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake  System  ABS   Brake Assist System  BAS   Traction Con   trol System  TCS   Hill Start Assist  HSA   Dynamic  Steering Torque  DST   and Electronic Stability Control   ESC   All systems work together to enhance vehicle  stability and control in various driving conditions and  are commonly referred to as ESC     Anti Lock Brake System  ABS     This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control  under adverse braking conditions  The system controls  hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and  help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking   Refer to    Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System    in    Start   ing and Operating    for further information     Brake Assist System  BAS     The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicles braking  capability during emergency braking maneuvers  The  system detects an emergency braking situation by sens   ing the rate and amount of brake application and then  applies optimum pressure to the brakes  This can help  reduce braking distances  The BAS complements the  Anti Lock Brake System  ABS   Applying the brakes very  quickly re
290. ver Override                Ls 308  General Information                          14  General Maintenance         o    ooo    oo    315    Glass Cleaning   esec ess cc Harare 347    Hazard   Driving Through Flowing  Rising  or Shallow   Standing Wateree ese te ced re hne ee 230  Headlights essc me RR e RUE nee 107   Cleaning iie ocbbecexes vbt er XP Reged ds 347   High  B  am A Miao ge wed ER undis 159   Passing  sis ee ure PERE A ERE RS 108  Heated  Mirrors  sla cue tpe peed E eas 89  Hill Start Assist    isse eee  e tem te 238  Holder  Cup sar SE ERE RSS e nag  143  HomeLink    Garage Door Opener               129  Hood  Release  4a dake eR ERES 104  Ignition      rr ir AE AS 12  Immobilizer  Sentry Key         oooooooooo o    13  Infant Restraint s esee e Re ores 57       388 INDEX IN    Information Center  Vehicle                    166  Inside Rearview MirrOT      o o oo o oo oooooo oo  85  Instrument Cluster         o o ooo oocooooo oo    155  Instrument Panel and Controls                  153  Instrument Panel Cover    nananana naua 347  Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning                348  Interior Appearance Care    ooooooooooo mo   oo   346  Interior Lighting              o ooooooo ooo    109  Introduction    kona daa a 4  Jacking Instructions       ooooooooooomoooo o 297  Jack Location    0    lille 294  Jack Operati  n z   edere werk oboe ee ee 294  Jump Starting i  o3 bru ea pg a eg ee gd 302  Key  Replacement        0 0    000 eere 14  KEYS a ta ns SE OG ioa bad ale
291. ver looks over his her shoulder when  using Rear Park Assist       Objects such as bicycle carriers  etc   must not be  placed within 12 in  30 cm  from the rear fascia   bumper while driving the vehicle  Failure to do so can  result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a  sensor problem  causing a failure indication to be  displayed in the instrument cluster        a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125    WARNING  WARNING   Continued     e Drivers must be careful when backing up even vehicle is not used for towing  Failure to do so can  when using ParkSense    Always check carefully result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles  behind your vehicle  look behind you  and be sure because the hitch ball will be much closer to the  to check for pedestrians  animals  other vehicles   obstructions  and blind spots before backing up     obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker  sounds the continuous tone  Also  the sensors    You are responsible for safety and must continue to could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem     pay attention to your surroundings  Failure to do so  can result in serious injury or death      Before using ParkSense    it is strongly recom   mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem   bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the    bly  depending on its size and shape  giving a false  indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle        If it   s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball  assembly
292. with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with   Canada RSS 210  Operation is subject to the following FCC and IC rules  Changes or modifications not ex    two conditions  pressly approved by the party responsible for compli    1  This device may not cause harmful interference  e E ae d qu  vice    2  This device must accept any interference that may be  received including interference that may cause unde   sired operation       The term IC before the certification registration num   ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci   fications were met        138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE  POWER SUNROOF     IF EQUIPPED    The sunroof has two glass panels  the front one is  operational and the rear one fixed  and is equipped with  an electrically operated sun blind     The power sunroof and the power sun blind can be  operated only with the ignition key turned to the ON   RUN position     The power sunroof and power sun blind switches are  located in the overhead console            a       A     Power Sunroof Switch  B     Power Sun Blind Switch       a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139    WARNING  To Open    Pull the power sunroof switch for approximately one  second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position   Pull the power sunroof switch a second time for approxi   mately one second and release  the sunroof will open  fully  then stop automatically  This is called    Express  Open     Du
293. with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle   It is supplemented by Warranty Information  and various  customer oriented documents  Please take the time to  read these publications carefully  Following the instruc   tions and recommendations in this manual will help  assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle     The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that   FIAT Group Automobiles offers to its customers      the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for  maintaining its validity   e the range of additional services available to FIAT Group  Automobiles customers    NOTE  After reviewing the owner information  it  should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc   ing and remain with the vehicle when sold     When it comes to service  remember that your authorized  studio knows your vehicle best  has factory trained techni   cians and genuine parts  and cares about your satisfaction     HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL    Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section  contains the information you desire     Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the  items of equipment ordered  certain descriptions and  illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment     The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual  contains a complete listing of all subjects     Consult the following table for a description of the  symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout  this Owner s Manual        INTRODUCTION 5    Cd  
294. ws that the Vehicle  Security Alarm is fully armed     The activation of the Vehicle Security Alarm is followed  by a self diagnosis stage  If a fault is detected during the  self diagnosis stage  the horn will sound a second time     If the horn sounds a second time  check that all doors   hood and liftgate are closed correctly  then rearm the  system        16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM    If the Vehicle Security Alarm sounds the horn a second  time even when all doors  hood and liftgate are correctly  closed  a fault has occurred in the operation of the  system  Contact your authorized studio     To Disarm The System    Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter  or insert the key  into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to  the ON RUN position     NOTE  The Vehicle Security Alarm will not disarm when  the metal insert of the key is used on a single door lock  cylinder     The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your  vehicle  however  you can create conditions where the  Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly  If you  remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE    transmitter  once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed   after 16 seconds   when you pull the door handle to exit   the alarm will sound  If this occurs  press the UNLOCK  button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle  Security Alarm     Central Lock Unlock  Switch Safe Lock Device       If Equipped   This safety device prevents the operation of the inter
295. ximum blower and temperature settings for best   windshield and side window defrosting     UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187    NOTE  The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix  or Defrost  even if the Air Conditioning  A C  button is  not pressed  This dehumidifies the air to help dry the  windshield  To improve fuel economy  use these modes  only when necessary     Rear Window Defrosting    Press  and release the rear window defrost button to turn  the function on off     The activation of the function is indicated by the rear  defrost warning light on the instrument panel switching  on  The function is automatically deactivated after  20 minutes     For versions markets where provided  press the rear  defrost button to activate defrosting of door mirrors and  heated rear window  for versions  markets  where pro   vided         188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL    NOTE  Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated  rear window over the heating filaments  to avoid damage  that might cause them to stop working properly     Air Recirculation    Press and release the Air Recirculation button  so that the  LED on the button switch is on  to enter recirculation  mode  It is advisable to switch internal air recirculation  on while standing in traffic or in tunnels to prevent the  introduction of polluted air     Do not use the function for a long time  particularly if  there are many passengers on board  to prevent the  windows from misting up     NOTE  Inter
296. you wish to turn the HSA system on or off  it can be done  using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec   tronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC   Refer to    Elec   tronic Vehicle Information Center  EVIC     in    Understand   ing Your Instrument Panel    for further information     A STARTING AND OPERATING 239    DYNAMIC STEERING TORQUE    The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system  with the electric power steering to increase the safety  level of the whole car     In critical situations  understeering  oversteering  brak   ing with different grip conditions   through the DST  function the ESC system controls the steering to imple   ment an additional torque contribution on the steering  wheel  to suggest the most correct manoeuvre to the  driver     The coordinated action of brakes and steering increases  the safety and car control feeling     NOTE  The DST is a driving aid system and does not  replace the driver s actions while driving the car     Electronic Stability Control  ESC     This system enhances directional control and stability of  the vehicle under various driving conditions  ESC cor   rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by  applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in  counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi   tion  Engine power may also be reduced to help the  vehicle maintain the desired path  ESC uses sensors in  the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the  driver and compare
297. your vehicle     For the following example  the combined weight of  occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs   392 kg      TOTAL   FRONT   REAR    EXAMPLE 1       Combined weight of  occupants and cargo  from Tire Placard    865 Ibs    865 Ibs    MINUS    minus    minus       Combined Occupant s  weight    Occupant 1  200 Ibs    Occupant 1  210 lbs   Occupant 2  180 Ibs    Occupant 3  150 tbs  TOTAL WEIGHT  540 ibs    540 Ibs  Occupant 1  200 Ibs    Occupant 2  200 lbs  TOTAL WEIGHT  400 lbs    400 Ibs       STARTING AND OPERATING 253    AVAILABLE  Cargo Luggage and  Trailer Tongue  Weight    195 Ibs    325 Ibs    465 Ibs    811a4d11       254 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    WARNING  Safety  WARNING     Overloading of your tires is dangerous  Overloading  can cause tire failure  affect vehicle handling  and      Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can  cause collisions      Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re   sult in over heating and tire failure     increase your stopping distance  Use tires of the  recommended load capacity for your vehicle  Never  overload them        Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion  TIRES     GENERAL INFORMATION j y  imn M    shock  Objects on the road and chuckholes can  Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure       Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve   hicle handling and can fail suddenly  resulting in  loss of vehicle control      Unequal tire pressures can cause steering pro
298. ys fully apply the parking brake when leav   ing your vehicle  or it may roll and cause damage or  injury  Also be certain to leave a manual transmis   sion in REVERSE or first gear  Failure to do so may  allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or  injury        234 STARTING AND OPERATING HN    CAUTION     If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the    parking brake released  a brake system malfunction  is indicated  Have the brake system serviced by an  authorized studio immediately        BRAKE SYSTEM    In the event power assist is lost for any reason  for  example  repeated brake applications with the engine  off   the brakes will still function  The effort required to  brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that  required with the power system operating     If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal  capability  the remaining system will still function with  some loss of braking effectiveness  This will be evident  by increased pedal travel during application  greater    pedal force required to slow or stop  and activation of the  Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during  brake use     Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System  ABS     The Four Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in  maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con   ditions  The system operates with a separate computer to  modulate hydraulic pressure  to prevent wheel lock up  and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces     The system s pump motor runs du
299. ystem     TPMS  Sunroof                      a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353       Vehicle    Vehicle                                  System  Stop Light   Clutch  Reverse  Gear  Sunroof   Parking Sensor   Rear Camera                      Cavity Fuse in Description Cavity Fuse oe Description  Fuse Fuse  Number Number  6 F43 20 Amp   Bi Directional 11 E37 7 5 Amp   Stop Light Switch   Yellow   Washer Brown   Instrument Panel  7 F48 20 Amp   Passenger Power Node  Yellow Window 12 F49 5 Amp Exterior Mirror   8 F13   75 Amp   Left Low Beam  Tan   GPS  Electric  Brown   Headlamp Leveling Mirror  Parking  9 F50   75 Amp   Airbag ancor  Brown 13 F31 5Amp   Climate Control   10 F51 5 Amp   Car Radio Switch  Tum    as a  Tan Climate Control 14 F47 20 Amp   Driver Power  Yellow   Window          354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN                                              Rear Interior Fuses i  Vehicle E       i Mini ar  The rear interior fuse panel and is located on the driver s   Cavity Fuse Fuse Description  side in the rear compartment  Number  1 F61 15 Amp   Lumbar Regulation    Blue Seats    2 F62 15 Amp   Heated Seats  Blue  3 F64 20 Amp   Hi Fi System  AE Es Yellow  geo 4 F65 20 Amp   Sun Blind  Yellow  5 F66 20 Amp   Sunroof  Yellow  6 F90 7 5 Amp   Left High Beam  Rear Fuse Panel Brown       a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355                                     Vehicle Mini  Cavity Fuse Description  Fuse  Number  7 F91 7 5 Amp   Right High Beam  Brown  8 F92 7 5 Amp   Left Fog Ligh
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
A VERSION - Elektronik Lavpris ApS    CY-1161  Bedienungsanleitung  Bedienungsanleitung Operating Manual IMPERIAL  駆 - 文化シャッター    Manuale dell`utente  Elixir Repertoire User Manual - Elixir Ambience and Repertoire  施工説明書 工事店様用    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file